MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS

Printing Guide

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT
INSTALLING OR OTHERWISE USING THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSTITUTES YOUR
ACCEPTANCE OF THE FOLLOWING TERMS AND CONDITIONS (UNLESS A SEPARATE
LICENSE IS PROVIDED BY THE SUPPLIER OF APPLICABLE SOFTWARE IN WHICH CASE
SUCH SEPARATE LICENSE SHALL APPLY). IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THESE TERMS, YOU
MAY NOT INSTALL OR USE THIS SOFTWARE, AND YOU MUST PROMPTLY RETURN THE
SOFTWARE TO THE LOCATION WHERE YOU OBTAINED IT.

THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THIS PRODUCT INCLUDES NUMEROUS INDIVIDUAL

SOFTWARE COMPONENTS, EACH HAVING ITS OWN APPLICABLE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (“EULA”). INFORMATION RELATING TO THE EULAS MAY BE FOUND IN AN
ELECTRONIC FILE INCLUDED ON THE USER DOCUMENTATION CD-ROM INCLUDED HERE-
WITH; HOWEVER, ALL SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION DEVELOPED OR CREATED BY
OR FOR TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION (“TTEC”) ARE PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF TTEC
AND ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT LAWS, INTERNATIONAL TREATY PROVISIONS,
AND OTHER APPLICABLE LAWS.

Grant of License
This is a legal agreement between you, the end-user (“You”), and TTEC and its suppliers. This
software, fonts (including their typefaces) and related documentation (“Software”) is licensed for
use with the system CPU on which it was installed (“System”) in accordance with the terms con-
tained in this Agreement. This Software is proprietary to TTEC and/or its suppliers.

TTEC and its suppliers disclaim responsibility for the installation and/or use of this Software, and
for the results obtained by using this Software. You may use one copy of the Software as installed
on a single System, and may not copy the Software for any reason except as necessary to use the
Software on a single System. Any copies of the Software shall be subject to the conditions of this
Agreement.

You may not, nor cause or permit any third party to, modify, adapt, merge, translate, reverse com-
pile, reverse assemble, or reverse engineer the Software. You may not use the Software, except in
accordance with this license. No title to the intellectual property in the Software is transferred to
you and full ownership is retained by TTEC or its suppliers. Source code of the Software is not
licensed to you. You will be held legally responsible for any copyright infringement, unauthorized
transfer, reproduction or use of the Software or its documentation.

Term
This license is effective until terminated by TTEC or upon your failure to comply with any term of
this Agreement. Upon termination, you agree to destroy all copies of the Software and its docu-
mentation.

You may terminate this license at any time by destroying the Software and its documentation and
all copies.

Disclaimer of Warranty
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGE-
MENT. TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY RELATING TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. IF THE SOFTWARE PROVES DEFECTIVE, YOU
(AND NOT TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS) SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ENTIRE COST OF
ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS DO
NOT WARRANT THAT THE FUNCTIONS CONTAINED IN THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTER-
RUPTED OR ERROR FREE.

ALL INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN THAT IS PROVIDED BY TTEC AND ITS AFFILIATES
PURSUANT TO A EULA IS PROVIDED “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

2 Printing Guide — SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Limitation of Liability
IN NO EVENT WILL TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY DAMAGES,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE (EXCEPT PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH
RESULTING FROM NEGLIGENCE ON THE PART OF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS), INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST DATA, LOST SAVINGS OR OTHER INCI-
DENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABIL-
ITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TTEC OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES, NOR FOR THIRD PARTY CLAIMS.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights

The Software is provided with RESTRICTED RIGHTS. Use, duplication or disclosure by the U.S.
Government is subject to restrictions set forth in subdivision (b) (3) (ii) or (c) (i) (ii) of the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software Clause set forth in 252.227-7013, or 52.227-19 (c) (2) of
the DOD FAR, as appropriate. Contractor/Manufacturer is TOSHIBA TEC Corporation, 6-78,
Minami-cho, Mishima-shi, Shizuoka-ken, 411-8520, Japan.

General
You may not sublicense, lease, rent, assign or transfer this license or the Software. Any attempt to
sublicense, lease, rent, assign or transfer any of the rights, duties or obligations hereunder is void.
You agree that you do not intend to, and will not ship, transmit (directly or indirectly) the Software,
including any copies of the Software, or any technical data contained in the Software or its media,
or any direct product thereof, to any country or destination prohibited by the United States Govern-
ment. This license shall be governed by the laws of Japan or, at the election of a Supplier of TTEC
concerned with a dispute arising from or relating to this Agreement, the laws of the Country desig-
nated from time to time by the relevant Supplier of TTEC. If any provision or portion of this Agree-
ment shall be found to be illegal, invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions or portions
shall remain in full force and effect.

YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT AND THAT YOU
UNDERSTAND ITS PROVISIONS. YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS. YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CONTAINS THE COM-
PLETE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND TTEC AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND
SUPERSEDES ANY PROPOSAL OR PRIOR AGREEMENT, ORAL OR WRITTEN, OR ANY
OTHER COMMUNICATION RELATING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS LICENSE
AGREEMENT.

TOSHIBA TEC Corporation, 6-78, Minami-cho, Mishima-shi, Shizuoka-ken, 411-8520, Japan.

Printing Guide — SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 3

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT
Trademarks
• The official name of Windows 98 is Microsoft Windows 98 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Me is Microsoft Windows Me Operating System.
• The official name of Windows 2000 is Microsoft Windows 2000 Operating System.
• The official name of Windows XP is Microsoft Windows XP Operating System.
• The official name of Windows Server 2003 is Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Operating Sys-
tem.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT, and the brand names and product names of other Microsoft
products are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the US and other countries.
• Apple, AppleTalk, Macintosh, Mac, TrueType, and LaserWriter are trademarks of Apple Com-
puter, Inc. in the US and other countries.
• Postscript is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
• Netscape is a trademark of Netscape Communications Corporation.
• IBM, AT and AIX are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• NOVELL, NetWare, and NDS are trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respec-
tive companies.

Copyright
© 2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved
Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written per-
mission of TTEC. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the informa-
tion contained herein.

4 Printing Guide — TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Preface
Thank you for purchasing e-STUDIO451c Series Multifunctional Digital Color Systems.
This guide provides instructions on how to set up your computer and print to the equip-
ment. Read this guide before printing to your e-STUDIO451c Series. Keep this guide
within easy reach, and use it to configure an environment that makes best of the e-
STUDIO’s functions.

About This Guide

This manual describes how to install the user software for the printer functions, set up
printing, and manage print jobs from Microsoft Windows, Apple Mac OS, and UNIX
computers.
For information about setting up network servers and clients to use the e-STUDIO451c
Series, see the Network Administration Guide. For general information on using the
copier, your computer, your application software, or your network, see the manuals that
accompany those products.

Conventions
• The term “this equipment” in this manual refers to the e-STUDIO451c Series.
• The term “e-Filing” in this manual is an abbreviation of “electronic filing”.

About Other Manuals

Other guides are included in the User Documentation CD-ROM provided with this sys-
tem:

Scanning Guide—explains how to scan operation such as Scan to e-Filing, Scan to

File, and Scan to E-mail.

TopAccess Guide—explains how to set up and manage network functions using the
TopAccess user functions — such as network job management and template registra-
tion — from client computers via a network.

Network Administration Guide— explains the basic configuration and administration

of the equipment in supported platform and network environments. It also includes
guidelines for setting up network servers to provide various network services.

e-Filing Guide—explains how to operate the e-Filing features by using the TWAIN
driver, File Downloader and e-Filing web utility.

Network Fax Guide—explains how to use the network fax features that enable users
to operate fax and internet fax sending from a client computer via network.

Printing Guide — Preface 5

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6 Printing Guide — Preface
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Table of Contents
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT ...........................................................2
Printing Guide

TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHT................................................................4

Preface ...........................................................................................................5
About This Guide.......................................................................................5
Conventions ......................................................................................... 5
About Other Manuals.................................................................................5
Table of Contents ...........................................................................................7
1. Overview.......................................................................................................15
Features and Functions................................................................................16
About the Client CD-ROM ............................................................................17
For Windows............................................................................................17
For Macintosh..........................................................................................18
For UNIX..................................................................................................18
2. Installing Client Software............................................................................19
Installing Client Software for Windows .........................................................20
About Client Software for Windows .........................................................20
Planning for Installation ...........................................................................20
Before Installing Client Software ........................................................20
When Same Printer Drivers Have Been Installed .........................20
When GL-DocMon Has Been Installed .........................................20
When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed..............................20
Type of Printer Drivers ....................................................................... 21
System Requirements ........................................................................21
About Installation Procedure ..............................................................22
Parallel Port Connection................................................................22
USB Connection............................................................................22
Local Area Network over TCP/IP ..................................................23
Internet Connection ....................................................................... 24
Novell Printing ...............................................................................25
Novell iPrint ...................................................................................26
Installing Client Software for Parallel Printing.......................................... 27
Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer ............................. 27
Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play...............................32
Windows 98/Me.............................................................................32
Windows 2000...............................................................................35
Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................38
Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard.......................40
Windows 98/Me.............................................................................41
Windows NT 4.0 ............................................................................44
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ....................................................48
Installing Client Software for USB Printing ..............................................53
Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play ...................................53
Windows 98/Me.............................................................................54
Windows 2000...............................................................................59
Windows XP/Server 2003 .............................................................61
Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing ..............................64
Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer..................64
Windows NT 4.0 ............................................................................64
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ....................................................67
Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard ...........72

Printing Guide — Table of Contents 7

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Windows NT 4.0 ............................................................................72
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ....................................................77
Installing Client Software for SMB Printing..............................................85
Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer .................................85
Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port...............91
Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print..................................96
Windows 98/Me.............................................................................96
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003.........................................98
Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard ...........................99
Windows 98/Me.............................................................................99
Windows NT 4.0 ..........................................................................101
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ..................................................106
Installing Client Software for IPP Printing..............................................112
Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard ...........................112
Installing Client Software for Novell Printing..........................................118
Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer .............................119
Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print .............................123
Windows 98/Me...........................................................................124
Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003.......................................127
Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard.......................130
Windows 98/Me...........................................................................130
Windows NT 4.0 ..........................................................................132
Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 ..................................................137
Installing Client Software for Novell iPrint..............................................143
Uninstalling Client Utilities Software ......................................................144
When Installed Using the Installer....................................................144
When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard ........................................148
Installing Client Software for Macintosh .....................................................150
About Client Software for Macintosh .....................................................150
Planning for Installation .........................................................................150
System Requirements ......................................................................150
Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x ................................................150
Installing the Macintosh PPD File.....................................................150
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x.......................................151
Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x .............156
Installing the Macintosh PPD File.....................................................156
Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X ...............................................159
Configuring the Installable Options ..................................................165
Installing Client Software for UNIX .............................................................167
Setting Up the UNIX Filters ...................................................................167
About UNIX Filters............................................................................167
Planning for Installation ....................................................................168
System Requirements .................................................................168
Configuring UNIX Printing Using UNIX Filters..................................168
Installing the UNIX Filters............................................................168
Configuring the Print Queue........................................................169
Changing the Default Values ......................................................173
Deleting the Print Queue .............................................................174
Setting Up the CUPS.............................................................................176
About CUPS .....................................................................................177
Configuring UNIX Printing Using CUPS ...........................................177

8 Printing Guide — Table of Contents

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Installing the CUPS for LPR Printing...........................................177
Installing the CUPS for IPP Printing ............................................181
Modifying or Configuring Printer..................................................183
Uninstalling Printer ......................................................................186
Other Installation Procedures .....................................................................188
Installing Client Software from TopAccess ............................................188
3. Printing .......................................................................................................193
Printing from Windows................................................................................194
Before Using the Printer Driver..............................................................194
Configuring the Options....................................................................194
Configuring the Options Manually ...............................................195
Configuring the Options Automatically ........................................196
Setting the Department Code...........................................................198
Copying the PPD File for Windows ..................................................200
Printing from Application........................................................................201
Considerations and Limitations ........................................................201
How to Print......................................................................................201
Setting Up Print Options ........................................................................203
How to Setup....................................................................................203
Setting Initial Values of Print Options ..........................................203
Setting Print Options for Each Print Job......................................204
Setting Print Options Using Profiles ............................................204
Print Options.....................................................................................207
Setup Tab....................................................................................209
Print Job Tab ...............................................................................215
Layout Tab - Standard Window...................................................218
Layout Tab - Booklet Window .....................................................223
Layout Tab - Multiple Pages per Sheet Window .........................225
Effect Tab ....................................................................................227
Image Quality Tab .......................................................................232
Font Tab ......................................................................................236
Configuration Tab........................................................................237
About Tab....................................................................................239
Printing with Extended Print Functionality .............................................239
Printing Various Print Job Types ......................................................239
Printing Scheduled Print Jobs .....................................................239
Printing Private Print Jobs ...........................................................240
Printing Proof Print Jobs..............................................................242
Creating An Overlay File .............................................................243
Storing to e-Filing ........................................................................243
Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options .........................244
Sort Printing ................................................................................244
Enlarge/Reduce Printing .............................................................246
Printing Color Document in Gray scale .......................................246
Stapling and Hole Punching ........................................................247
Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet ...............................................248
Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources .........248
Interleaving Pages ......................................................................250
Printing Booklets .........................................................................250
Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet................................252

Printing Guide — Table of Contents 9

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Using Watermarks.......................................................................255
Printing with an Overlay File........................................................257
Printing on a Tab Paper ..............................................................258
Printing from Macintosh..............................................................................261
Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x.....................................261
How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x................................................261
Selecting the Printer in the Chooser............................................261
Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computer .............262
Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x..................263
Page Attributes............................................................................263
Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x .............................264
General .......................................................................................264
Background Printing ....................................................................265
Color Matching ............................................................................266
Cover Page .................................................................................266
Font Settings ...............................................................................267
Job Logging.................................................................................267
Layout .........................................................................................268
Finishing Options ........................................................................269
Printing Modes ............................................................................273
Booklet Mode Options .................................................................274
Watermark Options .....................................................................275
Quality .........................................................................................276
Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x ......277
How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x .................277
Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers ...........277
Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X
10.3.x................................................................................................278
Page Attributes............................................................................279
Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x
280
Copies & Pages ..........................................................................281
Layout .........................................................................................281
Duplex .........................................................................................283
Output Options ............................................................................284
Scheduler ....................................................................................285
Paper Handling ...........................................................................285
Cover Page .................................................................................286
Error Handling .............................................................................287
Paper Feed .................................................................................287
Print Mode ...................................................................................288
Printer Features ..........................................................................289
Printing from UNIX......................................................................................298
Printing from an Application...................................................................298
Considerations and Limitations ........................................................298
Printing Using LP Command ............................................................298
Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options .......................................................298
Copies .........................................................................................298
Title .............................................................................................299
General Options ...............................................................................299
Print Language ............................................................................299

10 Printing Guide — Table of Contents

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Stapling .......................................................................................299
Output Bin ...................................................................................300
Hole Punching .............................................................................300
Media Type .................................................................................301
Paper Source ..............................................................................301
Duplexing ....................................................................................302
Paper Size...................................................................................302
Printing Modes ............................................................................303
Department Code ........................................................................303
Smoothing ...................................................................................304
Distinguish Thin Lines .................................................................304
Do not Print Blank Pages ............................................................304
Toner Save..................................................................................304
Booklet Modes ............................................................................304
Page Layout ................................................................................305
Center Margin .............................................................................306
Outer Margin ...............................................................................306
Collate .........................................................................................306
Orientation...................................................................................307
Font Pitch ....................................................................................307
Page Length ................................................................................307
Color Mode..................................................................................307
Pure Black and Pure Gray...........................................................308
Image Quality Type .....................................................................308
Halftone .......................................................................................308
Black Over Print ..........................................................................308
PCL5e Specific Options ...................................................................309
Text Wrapping .............................................................................309
Left Margin ..................................................................................309
Right Margin ................................................................................309
Top Margin ..................................................................................309
Text Length .................................................................................310
Banner Page ...............................................................................310
Other Printing Methods...............................................................................313
FTP Printing...........................................................................................313
Email Printing ........................................................................................314
4. Monitoring Print Jobs................................................................................315
Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon ..........................................316
Features and Functions.........................................................................316
How to Use TopAccessDocMon............................................................316
Running TopAccessDocMon............................................................316
Starting TopAccessDocMon........................................................317
Document Monitor Taskbar Menu ...............................................317
Configuring TopAccessDocMon.......................................................318
Configuring the Start Up Options ................................................318
Configuring the Notifications .......................................................319
Configuring the Refresh Rate......................................................320
Finding the Printer Address.........................................................321
Monitoring the Printer ............................................................................322
How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window..............................322

Printing Guide — Table of Contents 11

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu .............................322
Accessing from the Printers File Menu........................................322
Searching for a Printer ................................................................323
TopAccessDocMon Window ............................................................328
Checking Device Status ..............................................................330
Changing Monitoring Devices .....................................................331
Adding Devices ...........................................................................331
Monitoring Queues ......................................................................336
Event Notification .............................................................................339
5. Troubleshooting ........................................................................................341
When Printing cannot be Performed ..........................................................342
Printer Driver Errors....................................................................................343
Printer Driver Installation Error Messages.............................................343
Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files .........................................343
Client Software CD Now Required ...................................................343
File *.DRV on Client CD Count Not Be Found .................................343
Location Does Not Contain Information About Your Hardware........343
This Port is Currently in Use.............................................................344
Problem with the Current Printer Setup............................................344
Printer Driver General Errors.................................................................344
Driver Mapped to Wrong Port...........................................................344
Command Line Options Not Processed ...........................................345
Cannot Remember Document Password.........................................345
Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed ..........................................345
Cannot Print a Job Using SMB.........................................................345
Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver.................346
Cannot Change Settings on Font Tab and Configuration Tab .........346
TopAccessDocMon Errors..........................................................................347
TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions ....................................................347
The Device is Not Responding.........................................................347
Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue ......................347
Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/Warning/Errors.....348
TopAccessDocMon Error Messages .....................................................348
TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages ......................................348
TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages ..................................350
Device Status Indicators........................................................................355
6. Appendix ....................................................................................................359
Managing Fonts with Font Manager ...........................................................360
Installing Font Manager .........................................................................360
Searching Fonts ....................................................................................360
Installing Fonts in Windows ...................................................................361
Uninstalling Fonts in Windows...............................................................361
Removing Fonts from the Computer .....................................................361
Displaying Font Preview ........................................................................362
Creating a Font Group...........................................................................362
Sorting Fonts in the List.........................................................................363
Sorting by Name...............................................................................363
Sorting by Font Type ........................................................................363
Inverting the Alphabetical Order.......................................................363
Internal Fonts List .......................................................................................364

12 Printing Guide — Table of Contents

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 Internal PCL Fonts List ..........................................................................364
Internal PS Fonts List ............................................................................365
INDEX ................................................................................................................367
Printing Guide

Printing Guide — Table of Contents 13

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 14 Printing Guide — Table of Contents
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 1. Overview

OVERVIEW
1.

This section describes the overview of the printing functions.

• Features and Functions..................................................................................................................16
• About the Client CD-ROM...............................................................................................................17

Printing Guide 15
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 1. Overview

Features and Functions

Extensive Client Platform Support
This equipment supports printing from IBM-compatible PC, Macintosh, and UNIX work-
stations. Not all features are supported on all platforms, however.

Various Port Options

You can map this equipment to print to a SMB, IPP, Raw TCP, or LPR port.

Multiple Job Types

Job Types refer to the way this equipment handles a print job.
• Normal mode requires no special handling and is the most frequently used printing
mode.
• Scheduled Print lets you specify the time and date at which to print a job.
• Private Print mode allows you to hold a job in the print queue until you enter a Doc-
ument Identification Number (DIN) at the copier touch panel to print the job.
• Proof Print mode prints the first copy of a multi-copy job then awaits your approval
before printing the remaining copies.
• Overlay Image File prints a document element, such as text or graphics, to a file for
superimposing on other documents.

Professional Finishing Options

Depending on the type of finishing units you have installed on this equipment, you can
choose to sort, group, fold and staple your documents (including saddle-stitching) and
punch binding holes along the top or side edge.

Sophisticated Document Layout and Assembly Options

You can choose whether to print your document as you have set it up in the application,
or to impose printer-driven document layout options such as printing in Book Format or
printing Multiple Pages per Sheet.
Additionally, the printer drivers provide the ability to print selected pages on different
media. This includes printing front and back covers, inserting sheets at predefined posi-
tions within the document, or interleaving pages so that every other page is inserted
blank or printed on a different type of media.

Watermark and Image Overlay Support

Watermarks are a great way to subtly convey useful information about your printed doc-
uments. Common watermarks are “Confidential,” “Draft,” and “Original.” Several water-
marks have been pre-defined for use with your documents, or you can create and save
your own custom watermarks.
Watermarks consist of text. Image Overlays can be any combination of text, graphics or
other document elements.
Printing watermarks consumes fewer resources than using Image Overlays, so you
should use watermarks wherever possible, particularly when printing speed is an issue.

16 Printing Guide — Features and Functions

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 1. Overview

About the Client CD-ROM

For Windows
The contents of the Client Utilities CD-ROM:

Client Software Installer

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\setup.exe
This is the setup program to install the printer drivers, TopAccessDocMon, and Font
Manager on your computer.

PCL6 Printer Drivers

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 98/Me
for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0
for each language version by Add Printer Wizard.
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL6 printer driver on the Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.

PCL5c Printer Drivers

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL5c\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows 98/
Me for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PCL5c\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows NT
4.0 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard.
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PCL5c printer driver on the Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.

PS3 Printer Drivers (PostScript)

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 98/Me
for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows NT 4.0
for each language version by Add Printer Wizard.
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the PS3 printer driver on the Windows 2000/
XP/Server 2003 for each language version by Add Printer Wizard or Plug and Play.

USB Driver for Windows 98

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\USB\<language>\
This includes the setup files to install the USB driver on the Windows 98 for each
language version.

Printer Driver Setup files (Zip Compressed)

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\PandP\<language>\
This includes the compressed zip files that contain the setup files to install each
printer driver for each language version.

SUPPLEMENT: Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter.
P.20 "About Client Software for Windows"

Printing Guide — About the Client CD-ROM 17

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 1. Overview

For Macintosh
The contents of the Client Utilities CD-ROM:

Macintosh PPD files

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:Client:MacPPD:OS9:<language>
This includes the PPD file for Apple LaserWriter8 to enable printing from Macintosh
on the Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS 9.x, and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]:Client:MacPPD:OSX
This includes the PPD file for Apple LaserWriter8 to enable printing from Macintosh
on the Mac OS 8.6, Mac OS 9.x, and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode, the PPD
file to enable printing from Macintosh on the Mac OS X 10.2.4 or Mac OS X 10.3.x.

SUPPLEMENT: Further information about user software for Macintosh is described in next chapter.
P.150 "About Client Software for Macintosh"

For UNIX
The contents of the Client Utilities CD-ROM:

Solaris Filter
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/SolarisFilter/<language>/
This includes the Tar file for Solaris v2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9.

HP-UX Filter
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/HP-UXFilter/<language>/
This includes the Tar file for HP-UX ver.10.20/11.x.

AIX Filter
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/AIXFilter/<language>/
This includes the Tar file for AIX 4.1.5/4.3.3/5L.

Linux Filter
• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/LinuxFilter/<language>/
This includes the Tar file for Red Hat 6.2/7.1/7.2/7.3/8.0, SuSE Linux 7.0/8.1, Man-
drake Linux 7.1/9 and Turbo Linux 8.

SCO UNIX Filter

• [Client Utilities CD-ROM]/Admin/OpenUnixFilter/<language>/
This includes the Tar file for SCO UnixWare 7 and SCO OpenUNIX 8.

SUPPLEMENT: Further information about user software for Windows is described in next chapter.
P.167 "About UNIX Filters"

18 Printing Guide — About the Client CD-ROM

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. INSTALLING CLIENT SOFTWARE

This section describes the instructions on how to install the client software on Windows, Macintosh, or UNIX.
• Installing Client Software for Windows.........................................................................................20
• Installing Client Software for Macintosh.....................................................................................150
• Installing Client Software for UNIX ..............................................................................................167
• Other Installation Procedures......................................................................................................188

Printing Guide 19
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing Client Software for Windows

This section provides instructions for configuring the printing systems on Windows com-
puters.

About Client Software for Windows

Printer Drivers
Printer drivers are software components that enable application programs to interact
with the printer. The e-STUDIO451c Series comes with three printer drivers, PCL5c,
PCL6 and PS3 (PostScript) printer drivers. These printer drivers offer document print,
layout and assembly functions that are not available with many applications.

TopAccessDocMon
This utility allows you to monitor all jobs and control your own current jobs. With the
notification feature enabled, TopAccessDocMon informs you of copier or printing
events, such as paper-out or drawer open, before you walk to the copier to find your job
incomplete or unsuccessful.

Agfa Font Manager

This utility allows you to install and manage the TrueType fonts that are corresponding
to the internal PS fonts on the equipment.

SUPPLEMENT: There is another job monitoring utility, TopAccess, which allows you to monitor and
manage your print jobs over the Internet using either Netscape Navigator or Internet
Explorer. Because TopAccess is an embedded web-based device and job manage-
ment tool it does not require your installation.

Planning for Installation

This section will help you to plan an installation suited to your environment. Before
installing the client software, read this section.

Before Installing Client Software

Before installing the client software, confirm the followings to perform an appropriate
installation.

— When Same Printer Drivers Have Been Installed

Before updating the printer drivers, please delete the printer drivers.

— When GL-DocMon Has Been Installed

If the GL-DocMon for GL-1010 or GL-1020 has been installed, uninstall the GL-DocMon
to install the TopAccessDocMon. TopAccessDocMon can be used to monitor the GL-
1010 and GL-1020 controller.

— When TopAccessDocMon Has Been Installed

If the TopAcceessDocMon has been installed from either the e-STUDIO850 Series
Client1 CD-ROM, e-STUDIO4511 Series Client1 CD-ROM, e-STUDIO450 Series
Client1 CD-ROM, or e-STUDIO280 Series Client1 CD-ROM, you do not have to install it
from the other one. TopAccessDocMon can be used to monitor both devices.

20 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

If you want to install it from the e-STUDIO451c Series Client Utilities CD-ROM, uninstall
the TopAccessDocMon then install it. When you uninstall the TopAccessDocMon,
please click [No] at the dialog box that displays the message to delete the settings for
the TopAccessDocMon so that you can restore the settings after installing new one.

Type of Printer Drivers

• PCL6 Printer Driver — for printing gray scale documents that use TrueType fonts,
such as a Microsoft Word.
• PCL5c Printer Driver — for printing color documents that use TrueType fonts, such
as a Microsoft Word.
• PS3 Printer Driver — for high-graphical-content color documents that use Post-
Script fonts and graphics, such as Adobe PageMaker.

System Requirements
To install the printer drivers and other client software on a Windows workstation, the fol-
lowing is required.
• Display Resolution
1024 x 768 dots or more
• Display Color
High Color (16bit) or higher is recommended
• CPU
Pentium 133 MHz minimum (Pentium 266 MHz or faster recommended)
• Memory
64MB for Windows 98
96MB for Windows Me and Windows NT 4.0
128MB for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

The applicable computers depend on the printing systems:

• Raw TCP/LPR Printing
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows XP Service Pack 1
Windows Server 2003
• SMB Printing
Windows 98 (Windows 98 Second Edition Recommended)
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0 Service Pack 6a
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows XP Service Pack 1
Windows Server 2003
• IPP Printing
Windows 2000 Service Pack 4
Windows XP Service Pack 1
Windows Server 2003

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 21

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

About Installation Procedure

Please find the installation procedure suited to your environment from the following:
P.22 "Parallel Port Connection"
P.22 "USB Connection"
P.23 "Local Area Network over TCP/IP"
P.24 "Internet Connection"
P.25 "Novell Printing"

— Parallel Port Connection

Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Connecting with Parallel cable

Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Setting up the LPT1 Printer Windows XP
Connection Windows Server 2003

When this equipment is connected to your computer with a printer cable, you can install
the printer drivers from the Client Utilities CD-ROM and set up the printer connection
with LPT1 port.
P.27 "Installing Client Software for Parallel Printing"

NOTES: • Parallel printing is available only when the Parallel Interface is installed.
• This equipment cannot connect to the same computer with both Parallel and USB at
a same time.

— USB Connection
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003
Connecting with USB

Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows 2000
Setting up the USB Printer Windows XP
Connection Windows Server 2003

This equipment supports the USB 2.0 Full Speed connection. When this equipment is
connected to your computer with the USB cable, you must install the printer drivers
using the Windows Plug and Play functions.
P.53 "Installing Client Software for USB Printing"

NOTE: This equipment cannot connect to the same computer with both Parallel and USB at a
same time.

22 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

— Local Area Network over TCP/IP

When this equipment is connected to your computer in the local area network over
TCP/IP, various printing methods are available such as:
• Raw TCP/LPR Printing (only available for Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003)
• SMB Printing

Some of them are applicable to your environments, the printing methods generally rec-
ommended are decided by the Windows version.
• Windows 98, Windows Me — SMB Printing
• Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003 — Raw TCP/
LPR Printing

If you have no advance for an installation from your administrator, check these printing
methods whether they are suited to your network environments.

NOTE: It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recom-
mended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information about
setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.

SUPPLEMENT: You can also perform FTP printing over the TCP/IP network. For more information
about FTP printing, please refer to following section.
P.313 "FTP Printing"

Raw TCP/LPR Printing

Available for: Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
Windows Server 2003
Connecting over TCP/IP Network

Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Setting up the Raw TCP
or LPR printer connection

This equipment allows you to connect using Raw TCP or LPR which is available for
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. If you use
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003, Raw TCP/
LPR printing may be most suitable.
P.64 "Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing"

SUPPLEMENTS: • To print with a Raw TCP connection, this equipment must be configured to enable
Raw TCP Print Service. Ask your administrator if the Raw TCP Print Service is
enabled.
• To print with a LPR connection, this equipment must be configured to enable LPD
Print Service. Ask your administrator if the LPD Print Service is enabled.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 23

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

SMB Printing
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Network Environment over TCP/IP
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Setting up SMB Printer Windows XP
Connection Windows Server 2003
Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003

This equipment can be used with an SMB printer connection that allows you to connect
to this equipment using File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks service. SMB
printing is the common method used to set up the printer. However, SMB printing is not
suitable for printing a large amount of documents.
P.85 "Installing Client Software for SMB Printing"

NOTE: It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recom-
mended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information about
setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.

— Internet Connection
Available for: Windows 2000, Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Connecting over Internet

Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003
Setting up the IPP
printer connection

If you print to this equipment over the Internet, you can use IPP printing under Windows
2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. This allows you to print to this equip-
ment from anywhere on the Internet.
P.112 "Installing Client Software for IPP Printing"

24 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

SUPPLEMENTS: • To print with an IPP connection, this equipment must be configured to enable the
IPP Print Service and must be connected to the Internet. Ask your administrator if
the IPP Print Service is enabled.
• You can also perform Email printing over the Internet. For more information about
Email printing, please refer to following section.
P.314 "Email Printing"

— Novell Printing
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Connecting with a NetWare Environment over TCP/IP or IPX/SPX Network

NetWare 4.x
NetWare 5.x
NetWare 6.x
Setting up the Novell
printer connection

Setting up the SMB

printer connection
to Novell print queue

Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003

When this equipment is configured to manage printing with NetWare 4.x, or 5.x over
TCP/IP or IPX/SPX, you can print through the NetWare print server from Windows 98/
Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. In this
case, install the printer driver and set up the SMB printer connection to a print queue
created in the NetWare server.
P.118 "Installing Client Software for Novell Printing"

SUPPLEMENT: To print with a Novell connection, the NetWare server must be configured for printing
and this equipment must be configured to enable NetWare Print Service.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 25

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

— Novell iPrint
Available for: Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Server 2003
Connecting with a Novell iPrint Environment over TCP/IP Network

NetWare 6.x

Setting up the Novell

iPrint connection

Setting up the iPrint

printer connection
using iPrint Client

Windows 98
Windows Me
Windows NT 4.0
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Windows Server 2003

When this equipment is configured to manage iPrint with NetWare 6.x over TCP/IP, you
can print through the NetWare print server from Windows 98/Me, Windows NT 4.0, Win-
dows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003. In this case, install the printer
driver using iPrint Client from the NetWare server.
P.143 "Installing Client Software for Novell iPrint"

SUPPLEMENT: To print with a Novell iPrint, the NetWare server must be configured for iPrint and this
equipment must be configured to enable NetWare Print Service.

26 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing Client Software for Parallel Printing

This section describes how to install the client software when this equipment is con-
nected with a printer cable.

There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for parallel printing:
• Using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM
When you insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer
automatically starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using
the installer. If you want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this
method is convenient.
P.27 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"
• Using Plug and Play
When this equipment is connected to a parallel port of Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003 computers, the Plug and
Play Wizard automatically starts. While you can install a printer driver using this
method, other client software cannot be installed.
P.32 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play"
• Using Add Printer Wizard
When you want to install different printer drivers after installing a printer driver using
Plug and Play, or when you want to install the printer drivers without using the
installer or Plug and Play, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.
P.40 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard"

Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer

Installing the client software for parallel printing

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog
box appears.
• If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in the
Client Utilities CD-ROM.

2. Select your language and click [OK].

• The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 27

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Click [Next].

• The License Agreement screen is displayed.

4. Click [Yes].

• The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.

5. Click [Next].

• If you want to change the location where the programs are installed, click
[Browse]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and click [OK].
• The Setup Type screen is displayed.

28 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Select “Custom” and click [Next].

• The Select Components screen is displayed.

7. Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].

TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.

TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer
driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PCL5c — Check this to install the PCL5c
printer driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer
driver.
Agfa TrueType Fonts — Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts.
• The Select Port dialog box appears.

NOTE: The TopAccessDocMon is not available for parallel printing. Do not check this item.
However, when this equipment and your computer are connected to the TCP/IP local
area network and this equipment is connected to the parallel port of your computer, you
can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs.

NOTE: There are also Network Fax software and e-Filing software in the list. For more infor-
mation about these software, please see the Network Fax Guide and e-Filing Guide.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 29

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

8. Make sure “LPT1:” is displayed in the “Network path or

queue name” field and click [Next].

• The Select Program Folder screen is displayed.

9. Click [Next].

• If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the “Program
Folders” field.
• The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed.

30 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click [Next].

• If any printer drivers have been installed on your computer, the confirmation
message appears. Continue to next step.
• If no printer driver has been installed on your computer, it starts copying files
and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed when copying is
completed. Skip to Step 12.

NOTE: When you select to install the N/W-Fax driver, the Digital Signature Not Found dialog
box appears while copying files. Click [Yes] to continue the installation.

11. If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indi-
cated printer driver to be the default printer driver, or click
[No] to not change the default printer driver.

12. Click [Finish].

• If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the sys-

tem may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAc-
cessDocMon.

NOTE: The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 31

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

13. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installation for Parallel Printing by Plug and Play

The procedure to install the printer driver for Parallel printing by Plug and Play differs
depending on the version of the Windows being used.
P.32 "Windows 98/Me"
P.35 "Windows 2000"
P.38 "Windows XP/Server 2003"

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is only connected using
the printer cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected
to the local area network as well as this equipment is connected to the parallel port
of your computer, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To
install TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM sepa-
rately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

NOTE: The Plug and Play function is not supported in the Windows NT 4.0.

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play

The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same
when Windows Me is used.

1. Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com-

puter, and then power on the equipment and your computer.
• The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

2. Click [Next].

32 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select "Search for the best driver for your device. (Recom-
mended)" and click [Next].

4. Select “Specify a location” and click [Browse].

• The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

5. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

6. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/
Me is located and click [OK].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>".

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 33

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Click [Next].

8. Click [Next].

9. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

10. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

34 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

11. Click [Finish].

• The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000

Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000.

1. Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com-

puter, and then power on the equipment and your computer.
• The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

2. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 35

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recom-

mended)" and click [Next].

4. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

5. Select only “Specify a location” and click [Next].

6. Click [Browse].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

36 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows

2000 is located, select a INF file, and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

8. Click [OK].

9. Check [Next].

• It starts copying files.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 37

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click [Finish].

11. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Plug and Play

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.

1. Connect the printer cable to this equipment and your com-

puter, and then power on the equipment and your computer.
• The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

2. Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)"

and click [Next].

38 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.” and

check only the “Include this location in the search” check
box. Then click [Browse].

• The Browse For Folder dialog box appears.

4. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

5. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows

XP/Server 2003 is located and click [OK].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 39

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Click [Next].

• It starts copying files.

7. Click [Finish].

8. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard

The procedure to install the printer driver for Parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard dif-
fers depending on the version of the Windows being used.
P.41 "Windows 98/Me"
P.44 "Windows NT 4.0"
P.48 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is only connected using
the printer cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected
to the local area network as well as this equipment is connected to the parallel port
of your computer, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To
install TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM sepa-
rately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

40 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same
when Windows Me is used.

1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the

Printers folder.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 41

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select “Local printer” and click [Next].

5. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

6. Click [Browse...].

• The Open dialog box appears.

7. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

42 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

8. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/
Me is located and click [OK].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>".

9. Click [OK].

10. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

11. Select “LPT1:” and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 43

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

12. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

13. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

14. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows NT 4.0

Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard

NOTE: You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power
Users” privilege.

44 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the

Printers folder.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].

4. Select “LPT1:” and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 45

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

6. Click [Browse...].

• The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.

7. Click [Cancel].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

8. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

9. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT

4.0 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>".

46 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click [OK].

11. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

12. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

13. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer drivers
that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat the proce-
dure from Step 5 to 11 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 47

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

14. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

15. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer driver for parallel printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.

1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows

2000) or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server
2003).

• The Printers folder is opened.

48 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the Printer
Tasks menu.
• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect

and install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 49

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “Use the following port” and select “LPT1:”. Then

click [Next].

6. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

7. Click [Browse...].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

8. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

50 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

9. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows

2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

10. Click [OK].

11. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 51

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

12. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

13. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

14. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].

52 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

15. Click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

16. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installing Client Software for USB Printing

This section describes how to set up the printer drivers when this equipment is con-
nected with USB cable.
To set up the printer drivers for USB printing, you must install the printer drivers by Plug
and Play functions instead of installing the client software using the installer in the Client
Utilities CD-ROM.
When this equipment is connected to a USB port of Windows 98, Windows Me, Win-
dows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 computers, the Plug and Play Wiz-
ard automatically starts. You can install a printer driver using this method but other
client software cannot be installed.

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is not available when this equipment is connected using only
the USB cable. However, when this equipment and your computer are connected to
the local area network and this equipment is connected to the USB port of your
computer, you can use TopAccessDocMon to monitor your print jobs. To install
TopAccessDocMon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

NOTE: USB printing is not supported in the Windows NT 4.0.

Installation for USB Printing by Plug and Play

The procedure to install the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play differs
depending on the version of Windows used.
P.54 "Windows 98/Me"
P.59 "Windows 2000"
P.61 "Windows XP/Server 2003"

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 53

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play

The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same
when Windows Me is used.

1. Power on this equipment and your computer.

2. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

3. Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your com-

puter.
• The Add New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

NOTE: When you are installing the printer driver for USB printing on Windows Me, the USB
port driver automatically installed. In that case, please skip to step 11.

4. Click [Next].

5. Select “Search for the best driver for your device (Recom-
mended)” and click [Next].

54 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Check only the “Specify a location” check box and click

[Browse].

• The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

7. Select the “USB” folder in the Client Utilities CD-ROM and

click [OK].

8. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 55

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

9. Click [Next].

• It starts copying files.

10. Click [Finish].

• The USB printer port driver is installed and the Add New Hardware Wizard
dialog box appears again.

11. Click [Next].

12. Select "Search for the best driver for your device (Recom-
mended)" and click [Next].

56 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

13. Check only the “Specify a location” check box and click
[Browse].

• The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

14. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/
Me is located and click [OK].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>".

15. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 57

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

16. Click [Next].

17. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

19. Click [Finish].

58 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

20. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000

Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000.

1. Power on this equipment and your computer.

2. Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your com-
puter.
• The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

4. Select "Search for a suitable driver for my device (recom-

mended)" and click [Next].

5. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 59

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Select only “Specify a location” and click [Next].

7. Click [Browse].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

8. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows

2000 is located, select a INF file, and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

9. Click [OK].

60 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Check [Next].

• It starts copying files.

11. Click [Finish].

12. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer driver for USB printing by Plug and Play

The following describes an installation on Windows XP. The procedure is the same
when Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.

1. Power on this equipment and your computer.

2. Connect the USB cable to this equipment and your com-
puter.
• The Found New Hardware Wizard dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 61

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select "Install from a list or specific location (Advanced)"

and click [Next].

4. Select “Search for the best driver in these locations.” and

check only the “Include this location in the search” check
box. Then click [Browse].

• The Browse For Folder dialog box appears.

5. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

62 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows

XP/Server 2003 is located and click [OK].

• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

7. Click [Next].

• It starts copying files.

8. Click [Finish].

9. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 63

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing Client Software for Raw TCP/LPR Printing

This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for Raw TCP/LPR printing which
is available for the local area network over TCP/IP.

There are Two ways to set up the printer drivers for Raw TCP/LPR printing:
• Using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM
You can set up the printer drivers for Raw TCP/LPR printing by installing the printer
drivers using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM. Then you install and con-
figure the Raw TCP or LPR port to configure the connection.
P.64 "Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer"
• Using Add Printer Wizard
When you want to install the printer drivers without using the installer, or when you
want to install the same printer driver for another equipment, install the printer driv-
ers using the Add Printer Wizard.
P.72 "Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard"

NOTES: • Before operating the following setup, check with your system administrator to make
sure of the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.
• Raw TCP Printing is only available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows
Server 2003.
• LPR Printing is only available for Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP,
and Windows Server 2003.

Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing Using the Installer

Install the client software using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM first, then
configure the Raw TCP or LPR port in each printer driver.
The procedure to configure the Raw TCP or LPR port differs depending on the version
of Windows used.
P.64 "Windows NT 4.0"
P.67 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"

— Windows NT 4.0

Configuring the LPR port for Windows NT 4.0

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0.

1. Install the client software using the installer in the Client Util-
ities CD-ROM.
• Please install the client software following the instruction of the installation
for parallel printing.
P.27 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"

64 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-

tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.

3. Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File]

menu.

• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

4. Display the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

• The Printer Ports dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 65

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “LPR Port” and click [New Port...].

• The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears.

NOTE: If “LPR Port” is not listed, make sure the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed on your
Windows NT 4.0. “LPR Port” is not listed unless the TCP/IP Printing Service is
installed.

6. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Name or

address of server providing lpd” field and “Print” in the
“Name of printer or print queue on that server” field, and
click [OK].

• When your network uses DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this
equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Name or address of server
providing lpd” field.

7. Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

66 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

8. Make sure the created LPR port is checked in the “Print to

the following port” list and click [OK] to save settings.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Configuring the Raw TCP/LPR port for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003.

1. Install the client software using the installer in the Client Util-
ities CD-ROM.
• Please install the client software following the instruction of the installation
for parallel printing.
P.27 "Installation for Parallel Printing Using the Installer"

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 67

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-

tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.

• If you are using the Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, click [Start] and
[Printers and Faxes] to open the Printers and Faxes folder.

3. Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File]

menu.

• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

4. Display the [Ports] tab and click [Add Port].

• The Printer Ports dialog box appears.

68 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “Standard TCP/IP Port” and click [New Port...].

• The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.

6. Click [Next].

7. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Printer Name

or IP Address” field and click [Next].

• If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this
equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Printer Name or IP Address”
field.
• In the “Port Name” field, the port name is automatically entered according to
the IP address or DNS name entered in the “Printer Name or IP Address”
field.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 69

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

8. Select “Standard” and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: When the LPD Print setting is enabled, you can also configure LPR printing. When you
want to configure LPR printing, follow the procedure below.

Select “Custom” and click [Settings].

Select “LPR” at the “Protocol” option, enter “Print” in the “Queue Name” field at the
“LPR Settings” option, and then click [OK].

70 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Click [Next].

9. Click [Finish].

• The screen returns to the Printer Ports dialog box.

10. Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 71

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

11. Make sure the created Raw TCP or LPR port is checked in the
“Print to the following port” list and click [Close].

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installation for Raw TCP/LPR Printing by Add Printer Wizard

The procedure to install the printer driver for Raw TCP/LPR printing by Add Printer Wiz-
ard differs depending on the version of the Windows being used.
P.72 "Windows NT 4.0"
P.77 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is also available for Raw TCP/LPR printing. To install TopAc-
cessDocMon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

— Windows NT 4.0

Installing the printer driver for LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard

NOTE: You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power
Users” privilege.

72 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the

Printers folder.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].

4. Click [Add Port...].

• The Printer Ports dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 73

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “LPR Port” and click [New Port...].

• The Add LPR compatible printer dialog box appears.

NOTE: If “LPR Port” is not listed, make sure the TCP/IP Printing Service is installed on your
Windows NT 4.0. “LPR Port” is not listed unless the TCP/IP Printing Service is
installed.

6. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Name or

address of server providing lpd” field and “Print” in the
“Name of printer or print queue on that server” field, and
click [OK].

• When your network uses DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this
equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Name or address of server
providing lpd” field.

7. Click [Close] to close the Printer Ports dialog box.

8. Make sure that the created LPR Port is selected in the “Avail-
able ports” list and click [Next].

74 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

9. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

10. Click [Browse...].

• The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.

11. Click [Cancel].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

12. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT
4.0 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>".

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 75

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

14. Click [OK].

15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

76 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

• When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of
printer drivers that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating
systems, repeat the procedure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers
for selected operating systems.

18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

19. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer driver for Raw TCP/LPR printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 77

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows

2000) or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server
2003).

• The Printers folder is opened.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the Printer
Tasks menu.
• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

78 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect

and install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].

5. Select “Create a new port” and select “Standard TCP/IP Port”

in the “Type” drop down box. Then click [Next].

• The Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard dialog box appears.

6. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 79

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Enter the IP address of this equipment in the “Printer Name

or IP Address” field and click [Next].

• If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this
equipment provided from DNS or WINS in the “Printer Name or IP Address”
field.
• In the “Port Name” field, the port name is automatically entered according to
the IP address or DNS name entered in the “Printer Name or IP Address”
field.

8. Select “Standard” and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: When the LPD Print setting is enabled, you can also configure LPR printing. When you
want to configure LPR printing, follow the procedure below.

Select “Custom” and click [Settings].

80 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Select “LPR” at the “Protocol” option, enter “Print” in the “Queue Name” field at the
“LPR Settings” option, and then click [OK].

Click [Next].

9. Click [Finish].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 81

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

11. Click [Browse...].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

12. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

82 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

14. Click [OK].

15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 83

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].

84 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

19. Click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

20. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installing Client Software for SMB Printing

This section describes how to set up the client software for SMB printing which is avail-
able for the local area network over TCP/IP.

There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for SMB printing:
• Using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM
When you insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer
automatically starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using
the installer. If you want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this
method is convenient.
P.85 "Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer"
• Using Point and Print
You can install the printer driver by double-clicking network queues on the system.
By this method, printer drivers can be downloaded from the system so that the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM is not required. However, other client software cannot be
installed using this method.
P.96 "Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print"
• Using Add Printer Wizard
When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment
using Point and Print, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.
P.99 "Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard"

NOTE: Before installing the printer driver for SMB printing, check with your system administra-
tor to make sure of the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.

Installation for SMB Printing Using the Installer

You can install the client software and set up the SMB printing using the installer in the
Client Utilities CD-ROM.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 85

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

NOTE: It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recom-
mended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information about
setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.

Installing the client software for SMB printing

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows are used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog
box appears.
• If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in the
Client Utilities CD-ROM.

2. Select your language and click [OK].

• The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

• The License Agreement screen is displayed.

86 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Click [Yes].

• The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.

5. Click [Next].

• If you want to change the location where the programs are installed, click
[Browse]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and click [OK].
• The Setup Type screen is displayed.

6. Select “Custom” and click [Next].

• The Select Components screen is displayed.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 87

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].

TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.

TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer
driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PCL5c — Check this to install the PCL5c
printer driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer
driver.
Agfa TrueType Fonts — Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts.
• The Select Port dialog box appears.

NOTE: There are also Network Fax software and e-Filing software in the list. For more infor-
mation about these software, please see the Network Fax Guide and e-Filing Guide.

8. Click [Browse].

• The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.

SUPPLEMENT: You can also automatically specify the network queue by searching the equipment in
the network.
P.91 "Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port"

88 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

9. Locate this equipment in your network, select the “print”

queue, and click [OK].

NOTE: Do not select “pcl6”, or “ps3” queue. These queues only accept the print job in each
emulation. If you install several printer drivers and specify one of these queues, the
print job may not be printed properly due to mismatch of the emulations between the
print job and queue.

10. Click [Next].

• The Select Program Folder screen is displayed.

11. Click [Next].

• If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the “Program
Folders” field.
• The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 89

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

12. Click [Next].

• If any printer drivers have been installed on your computer, the confirmation
message appears. Continue to next step.
• If no printer driver has been installed on your computer, it starts copying files
and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed when copying is
completed. Skip to Step 14.

NOTE: When you select to install the N/W-Fax driver, the Digital Signature Not Found dialog
box appears while copying files. Click [Yes] to continue the installation.

13. If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indi-
cated printer driver to be the default printer driver, or click
[No] to not change the default printer driver.

14. Click [Finish].

• If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the sys-

tem may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAc-
cessDocMon.

NOTE: The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.

90 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

15. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Using the Discovery Functions to Specify the SMB Port

In the Select Port screen during the installation, you can also obtain the network queue
name automatically by searching the equipment.

There two ways to obtain the SMB printer port from the equipment:
P.91 "Searching the equipment automatically"
P.93 "Specifying the IP address manually"

Searching the equipment automatically

1. Click [Discovery].

• The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.

2. Click [Start Discovery].

• It starts searching the equipment in the network.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 91

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

SUPPLEMENT: It searches the equipment within the local subnet in your network. If the equipment is
located in the different subnet from your computer, or you want to specify the IP
address range to be searched, click [Advance]. The Discovery Settings dialog box
appears and you can specify the advanced settings for searching the equipment.

- Devices — You can specify the device models to be searched. This sets to search
the e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-
STUDIO450 Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series, so you do not have to change this
options.
- Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search — Check on this to search printers which con-
nect to the IPX/SPX network. This is available only when the IPX/SPX protocol and
Novell Client are installed in your computer, and the computer is connected to the
NetWare server.
- Network - Enable TCP/IP Search — Check on this to search printers which con-
nect to the TCP/IP network. This is available only when the TCP/IP protocol is
installed in your computer. When this is enabled, select how it searches printers in
the TCP/IP network.
Search local subnet — Select this to search printers in local subnet.
Specify a range — Select this to search printers in specific range of IP addresses.
When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in “From” field and “To” field to specify
the range.

3. Select the equipment that you want to connect and click

[OK].

92 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. It automatically obtains the network queue in the “Network

path or queue name” field.

NOTE: It automatically obtains the IP address of the equipment and the queue name specified
by an administrator, in the “Network path or queue name” field in the General submenu
page of the Setup menu in the TopAccess administrator mode. If you cannot obtain the
queue name, ask your administrator that the “Network path or queue name” field is cor-
rectly specified.

5. Continue the installation from step 10 of "Installing the client

software for SMB printing" on page 86.

Specifying the IP address manually

1. Click [Discovery].

• The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 93

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Click [Manual Selection].

• The Manual Selection dialog box appears.

3. Enter each item to specify the printer address and click [OK].

IP Address — Enter the IP address of the printer.

IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only
when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and
the computer is connected to the NetWare server.
Name — Enter the printer name.
Location — Enter the location of the printer.

NOTE: You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.

94 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select the equipment that you want to connect and click

[OK].

5. It automatically obtain the network queue in the “Network

path or queue name” field.

NOTE: It automatically obtains the IP address of the equipment and the queue name specified
by an administrator, in the “Network path or queue name” field in the General submenu
page of the Setup menu in the TopAccess administrator mode. If you cannot obtain the
queue name, ask your administrator that the “Network path or queue name” field is cor-
rectly specified.

6. Continue the installation from step 10 of "Installing the client

software for SMB printing" on page 86.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 95

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installation for SMB Printing by Point and Print

The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Point and Print differs
depending on the version of Windows used.
P.96 "Windows 98/Me"
P.98 "Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003"

NOTE: It assumes using SMB printing by Point and Print in a small network. If you can use the
Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print
server, it is recommended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further
information about setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network
Administration Guide.

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing. To install TopAccessDocMon,

you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print

1. Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer,

and double-click a queue in which the printer driver should
be installed (see below).

pcl5c — Double-click this queue to install the PCL5c printer driver.

pcl6 — Double-click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver.
ps3 — Double-click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver.
• The Printers dialog box appears.

2. Click [Yes].

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

96 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select whether printing MS-DOS-based programs and click

[Next].

4. Change the name if desired, select whether you are using

this printer as a default printer, and click [Next].

5. Select “Yes” to print a test page and click [Finish].

6. Make sure a test page is printed successfully and click [Yes]

to close the dialog box.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 97

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. The printer driver is installed and the print queue window

appears.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer drivers for SMB printing by Point and Print

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.

1. Open this equipment in the network with Windows Explorer,

and double-click a queue in which the printer driver should
be installed (see below).

pcl6 — Double-click this queue to install the PCL6 printer driver.

ps3 — Double-click this queue to install the PS3 printer driver.
• The Printers dialog box appears.

2. Click [Yes].

3. The printer driver is installed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

98 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installation for SMB Printing by Add Printer Wizard

The procedure to install the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard differs
depending on the version of the Windows being used.
P.99 "Windows 98/Me"
P.101 "Windows NT 4.0"
P.106 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"

NOTE: It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recom-
mended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information about
setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is also available for SMB printing. To install TopAccessDocMon,

you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same
when Windows Me is used.

1. Install the printer driver by Add Printer Wizard.

• Please install the printer driver following the instruction of the installation for
parallel printing.
P.40 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard"

2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-

tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 99

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File]

menu.

• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

4. Display the [Details] tab and click [Add Port].

• The Add Port dialog box appears.

5. Select “Other” and “Local Port”, and click [OK].

• The Port Name dialog box appears.

100 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].

Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-00C67861

\\MFP-00C67861\print

SUPPLEMENT: You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print

7. Click [OK] to save settings.

— Windows NT 4.0

Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard

NOTE: You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power
Users” privilege.

1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the

Printers folder.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 101

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].

4. Click [Add Port...].

• The Printer Ports dialog box appears.

5. Select “Local Port” and click [New Port...].

• The Port Name dialog box appears.

102 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].

Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-00C67861

\\MFP-00C67861\print

SUPPLEMENT: You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print

7. Click [Close].

8. Make sure the created port is selected and click [Next].

9. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 103

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click [Browse...].

• The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.

11. Click [Cancel].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

12. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT
4.0 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>".

14. Click [OK].

104 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 105

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer drivers
that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat the proce-
dure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems.

18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

19. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.

106 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows

2000) or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server
2003).

• The Printers folder is opened.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the Printer
Tasks menu.
• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 107

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect

and install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].

5. Select “Create a new port” and select “Local Port” in the

“Type” drop down box. Then click [Next].

• The Port Name dialog box appears.

6. Enter “\\<NetBIOS Name>\print” in the field and click [OK].

Example: NetBIOS Name = MFP-00C67861

\\MFP-00C67861\print

SUPPLEMENT: You can also enter the IP address instead of the NetBIOS Name.
Example: \\10.10.70.120\print

108 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

8. Click [Browse...].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

9. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

10. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 109

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

11. Click [OK].

12. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

110 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

13. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

14. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

15. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 111

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

16. Click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

17. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installing Client Software for IPP Printing

This section describes how to set up the printer drivers for IPP printing which is avail-
able for Internet connection.
To set up the printer drivers for IPP printing, install the printer drivers by Add Printer
Wizard, and then install the other software that you require.

NOTES: • Before installing the printer driver for IPP printing, check with your system adminis-
trator to make sure of the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The TCP/IP setting is correct on this equipment and your computer.
• IPP Printing is only available for Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server
2003.

Installation for IPP Printing by Add Printer Wizard

Installing the printer driver for IPP printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege.

112 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows

2000) or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server
2003).

• The Printers folder is opened.

2. Double-click the [Add Printers] icon.

• When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the Printer
Tasks menu.
• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 113

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select “Network printer” and click [Next].

5. Select “Connect to a printer on the Internet or on your intra-

net”, and enter “http://[IP address]:631/Print” in the “URL”
field.

• Enter the IP address of this equipment instead of [IP address].

Example: IP address = 10.10.70.105
http://10.10.70.105:631/Print
• If your network uses a DNS or WINS server, enter the printer name of this
equipment provided from DNS or WINS instead of [IP address].
Example: Print Server Name = Mfp-00c67861
http://Mfp-00c67861:631/Print
• When you connect from the Internet, enter the FQDN of this equipment pro-
vided from DNS instead of [IP address].
Example: URL = mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com
http://mfp_00c67861.toshiba.com:631/Print

NOTE: “P” for “Print” in the IPP URL must be capitalized. When you are using on Windows XP,
the IPP port can be created by entering “print” (non-capitalized) in the IPP URL, but the
print job cannot be sent to the equipment. In that case, delete the IPP port and then
create the IPP port correctly again.

SUPPLEMENTS: • If an administrator has enabled the IPP Port80 Enabled option on this equipment,
you can exclude the port number from the URL. (i.e. “http://192.168.255.48/Print”)
• If an administrator has enabled the Enable SSL option for IPP Print, you must enter
“https://[IP address]:[SSL port number]/Print” in the “URL” field.
(i.e. “https://192.168.255.48:443/Print”)

114 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Click [Next].
• The Connect to Printer dialog box appears.

NOTE: When the Authentication setting for IPP Print is enabled, the dialog box to enter a user
name and password appears. If this dialog box appears, enter the user name and
password and click [OK]. For user name and password, please ask your administrator.

7. Click [OK].

8. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

9. Click [Browse...].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

10. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 115

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

11. Locate the directory where the printer driver for your Win-
dows version is located, select the INF file, and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003,

locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003,
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver for Windows 2000/XP/ Server 2003,
locate "[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

12. Click [OK].

13. Select the printer driver and click [OK].

• If any other printer driver(s) had already been installed on your computer, the
Default Printer screen is displayed. Continue to next step.
• If no printer driver had been installed on your computer, the complete screen
is displayed. Skip to step 15.

116 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

14. Select whether using this printer as a default printer and

click [Next].

15. Click [Finish].

16. The printer driver is installed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

SUPPLEMENT: If you want to install TopAccessDocmon and Agfa Font Manager, you must install them
from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 117

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing Client Software for Novell Printing

This section describes how to install the client software for Novell printing on NetWare
print server environments.

There are three ways to set up the printer drivers for Novell printing:
• Using the installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM
When you insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into your CD-ROM drive, the installer
automatically starts. You can install printer drivers and other client software using
the installer. If you want to install printer drivers as well as other client software, this
method is convenient.
P.119 "Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer"
• Using Point and Print
You can install the printer driver by double-clicking network queues on the NetWare.
If the NetWare has been set up for NDPS, printer drivers can be downloaded from
the system so that the Client Utilities CD-ROM is not required. However, other client
software cannot be installed using this method.
P.123 "Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print"
• Using Add Printer Wizard
When you want to install the printer drivers without connecting to the equipment
using Point and Print, install the printer drivers using the Add Printer Wizard.
P.130 "Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard"

NOTE: Before installing the printer driver for Novell printing, check with your system adminis-
trator to make sure of the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The NetWare server is configured correctly and running on your network.
- The IPX/SPX or TCP/IP, and NetWare settings are correct on this equipment.

Before installing the client software for Novell printing, please make sure following net-
work services and protocols are installed on your computer:

Windows 98/ME
• TCP/IP protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP/IP network.)
• IPX/SPX-compatible protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX/
SPX network.)
• Client for NetWare Network
• Service for NetWare Directory Service (Required only when using the NetWare
server in NDS mode.)

Windows NT 4.0
• TCP/IP protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the TCP/IP network.)
• NWLink IPX/SPX Compatible Transport protocol (Required only when using the
NetWare in the IPX/SPX network.)
• NWLink NetBIOS protocol (Required only when using the NetWare in the IPX/SPX
network.)
• Gateway (and Client) Services for NetWare

Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

• NWLink IPX/SPX/NetBIOS Compatible Transport Protocol (Required only when
using the NetWare in the IPX/SPX network.)
• Gateway (and Client) Services for NetWare

118 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installation for Novell Printing Using the Installer

You can install the client software and set up the Novell printing using the installer in the
Client Utilities CD-ROM.

Installing the client software for Novell printing using the installer

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows are used.

NOTES: • You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.
• You have an appropriate privilege to access the NetWare server.

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• The installer automatically starts and the Choose Setup Language dialog
box appears.
• If the installer does not automatically start, double-click “Setup.exe” in the
Client Utilities CD-ROM.

2. Select your language and click [OK].

• The InstallSheild Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

• The License Agreement screen is displayed.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 119

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Click [Yes].

• The Choose Destination Location screen is displayed.

5. Click [Next].

• If you want to change the location where the programs are installed, click
[Browse]. In the dialog box that appears, select the folder and click [OK].
• The Setup Type screen is displayed.

6. Select “Custom” and click [Next].

• The Select Components screen is displayed.

120 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Check the software that you want to install and click [Next].

TopAccessDocMon — Check this to install the Document Monitor.

TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PCL6 — Check this to install the PCL6 printer
driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PCL5c — Check this to install the PCL5c
printer driver.
TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PSL3 — Check this to install the PS3 printer
driver.
Agfa TrueType Fonts — Check this to install Agfa Font Manager and fonts.
• The Select Port dialog box appears.

NOTE: There are also Network Fax software and e-Filing software in the list. For more infor-
mation about these software, please see the Network Fax Guide and e-Filing Guide.

8. Enter “\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>” in the

“Network path or queue name” field, and click [Next].
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_queue
\\Nwsrv\mfp_queue

SUPPLEMENT: The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not know
the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 121

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

9. Click [Next].

• If you want to change the program folder, rename the folder in the “Program
Folders” field.
• The Starting Copying Files screen is displayed.

10. Click [Next].

• If any printer drivers have been installed on your computer, the confirmation
message appears. Continue to next step.
• If no printer driver has been installed on your computer, it starts copying files
and the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen is displayed when copying is
completed. Skip to Step 12.

NOTE: When you select to install the N/W-Fax driver, the Digital Signature Not Found dialog
box appears while copying files. Click [Yes] to continue the installation.

11. If the following message appears, click [Yes] to set the indi-
cated printer driver to be the default printer driver, or click
[No] to not change the default printer driver.

122 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

12. Click [Finish].

• If you selected to install TopAccessDocMon during the installation, the sys-

tem may ask whether you want to view the Readme file and launch TopAc-
cessDocMon.

NOTE: The Installer may ask you to restart your computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to
restart my computer now.” and click [Finish] to restart your computer.

13. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installation for Novell Printing by Point and Print

The procedure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Point and Print differs
depending on the version of Windows used.
P.124 "Windows 98/Me"
P.127 "Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003"

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing. To install TopAccessDoc-

Mon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 123

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print

1. Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network

with Windows Explorer, and double-click a queue.
When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, open the NetWare file
server and double-click the queue for the equipment.

When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, browse the
NDS tree and context, and double-click the queue for the equipment.

• The Printers dialog box appears.

2. Click [Yes].

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

124 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Select whether printing MS-DOS-based programs and click

[Next].

• When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for each
Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the printer driver is auto-
matically installed. Skip to Step 10.
• Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each Oper-
ating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the Add Printer Wizard dialog
box appears. Continue to the next step.

4. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

5. Click [Browse...].

• The Open dialog box appears.

6. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 125

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows 98/
Me is located and click [OK].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>".

8. Click [OK].

9. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

126 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Change the name if desired, select whether you are using
this printer as a default printer, and click [Next].

11. Select “Yes” to print a test page and click [Finish].

12. The printer driver is installed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer drivers for Novell printing by Point and Print

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows NT 4.0, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 127

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Open the NetWare queue for the equipment in the network

with Windows Explorer, and double-click a queue.
When the NetWare has been set up for the Bindery mode, open the NetWare file
server and double-click the queue for the equipment.

When the NetWare has been set up for the NDS or NDPS mode, browse the
NDS tree and context, and double-click the queue for the equipment.

• The Printers dialog box appears.

2. Click [Yes].

• When using the NetWare in NDPS mode and the printer drivers for each
Operating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the printer driver is auto-
matically installed.
• Unless using the NetWare in NDPS mode and printer drivers for each Oper-
ating System are installed to a NDPS broker, the Add Printer Wizard dialog
box appears. Continue to the next step.

3. Click [OK].

128 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

5. Click [Browse...].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

6. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

7. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows

2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 129

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

8. Click [OK].

9. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

10. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installation for Novell Printing by Add Printer Wizard

The procedure to install the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard dif-
fers depending on the version of the Windows being used.
P.130 "Windows 98/Me"
P.132 "Windows NT 4.0"
P.137 "Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003"

SUPPLEMENTS: • TopAccessDocMon is also available for Novell printing. To install TopAccessDoc-

Mon, you must install it from the Client Utilities CD-ROM separately.
• The Agfa Font Manager is also available to install and manage the TrueType fonts
on your computer. To install the Agfa Font Manager, you must install it from the Cli-
ent Utilities CD-ROM separately.

— Windows 98/Me

Installing the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 98. The procedure is the same
when Windows Me is used.

1. Install the printer driver by Add Printer Wizard.

• Please install the printer driver following the instruction of the installation for
parallel printing.
P.40 "Installation for Parallel Printing by Add Printer Wizard"

130 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. After installing the client software, click [Start], select [Set-

tings], and click [Printers] to open the Printers folder.

3. Select the printer driver and select [Properties] in the [File]

menu.

• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

4. Display the [Details] tab and click [Add Port].

• The Add Port dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 131

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “Other” and “Local Port”, and click [OK].

• The Port Name dialog box appears.

6. Enter “\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>” in the

“Enter a port name” field, and click [OK].
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_queue
\\Nwsrv\mfp_queue

SUPPLEMENT: The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not know
the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.

7. Click [OK] to save settings.

— Windows NT 4.0

Installing the printer driver for SMB printing by Add Printer Wizard

NOTE: You must log into Windows NT 4.0 as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power
Users” privilege.

132 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start], select [Settings], and click [Printers] to open the

Printers folder.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Select “My Computer” and click [Next].

4. Click [Add Port...].

• The Printer Ports dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 133

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “Local Port” and click [New Port...].

• The Port Name dialog box appears.

6. Enter “\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>” in the

“Enter a port name” field, and click [OK].
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_queue
\\Nwsrv\mfp_queue

SUPPLEMENT: The queue for this equipment should be set up by an administrator. If you do not know
the queue for this equipment, ask your administrator.

7. Click [Close].

8. Make sure the created port is selected and click [Next].

134 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

9. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

10. Click [Browse...].

• The “A:\ is not accessible” message appears.

11. Click [Cancel].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

12. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.
• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

13. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows NT
4.0 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>".

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 135

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

14. Click [OK].

15. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

16. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

136 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

17. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: When you select “Shared”, you can also select the operating systems of printer drivers
that you want to install for clients. If you select any operating systems, repeat the proce-
dure from Step 9 to 15 to install the printer drivers for selected operating systems.

18. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Finish].

19. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

— Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

Installing the printer driver for Novell printing by Add Printer Wizard

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 is used.

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows 2000, Windows XP or Windows Server 2003.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 137

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click [Start] and select [Printers] in [Settings] (Windows

2000) or select [Printers and Faxes] (Windows XP/Server
2003).

• The Printers folder is opened.

2. Double-click the [Add Printer] icon.

• When using the Windows XP/Server 2003, click [Add a printer] in the Printer
Tasks menu.
• The Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Click [Next].

138 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select “Local printer”, uncheck the “Automatically detect

and install my Plug and Play printer”, and click [Next].

5. Select “Create a new port” and select “Local Port” in the

“Type” drop down box. Then click [Next].

• The Port Name dialog box appears.

6. Enter “\\<NetWare file server name>\<queue name>” in the

“Enter a port name” field, and click [OK].
Example: NetWare file server name=Nwsrv, queue name=mfp_queue
\\Nwsrv\mfp_queue

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 139

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Click [Have Disk...].

• The Install From Disk dialog box appears.

8. Click [Browse...].

• The Locate File dialog box appears.

9. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

• When inserting the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the installer may automatically
start. Click [Cancel] to exit the installer and continue the operation.

10. Locate the directory where the printer driver for Windows
2000/XP/Server 2003 is located and click [Open].

• To install the PCL5c printer driver, locate

"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL5c\<language>".
• To install the PCL6 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PCL6\<language>".
• To install the PS3 printer driver, locate
"[CD-ROM drive]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>".

140 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

11. Click [OK].

12. Select the printer driver and click [Next].

NOTE: If the same printer driver has been installed, the following dialog box appears. If it
appears, select “Replace existing driver” and click [Next].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 141

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

13. Change the name if desired and click [Next].

SUPPLEMENT: If any printer drivers have installed on the computer, select whether using this printer as
a default printer.

14. Select whether this printer is shared or not, and click [Next].

15. Select "Yes" to print a test page and click [Next].

142 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

16. Click [Finish].

• Start copying files.

17. The installation is completed.

NOTE: Before using the printer driver for printing, please configure the installed options of the
equipment and department code (if required) on the printer driver.
P.194 "Before Using the Printer Driver"

Installing Client Software for Novell iPrint

This section describes how to install the printer drivers for Novell iPrint.

NOTES: • To set up the iPrint in the client computers, the NetWare server must be configured
for iPrint first. For more information about setting up the NetWare server for Novell
iPrint, please see Network Administration Guide.
• Before installing the printer driver for Novell iPrint, the printer driver for Novell iPrint,
please make sure the following environments are satisfied in your computer.
- Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or later or Netscape 4.76 is installed (iPrint is not
supported on Netscape 6)
- JavaScript must be enabled on the web browser.

Installing the printer driver for Novell iPrint

To install the printer driver for Novell iPrint on the client computer, download and install
the iPrint Client and printer driver from the NetWare server.

1. Start the your web browser and enter the following URL in
the address bar.
http://<IP address or DNS for NDPS Manager>/ipp

NOTES: • If you do not know the IP address or DNS for NDPS Manager, please ask your net-
work administrator.
• If the IP address or DNS is secured using SSL, enter the URL address as following:
https://<IP address or DNS for NDPS Manager>/ipps

2. If the iPrint Client is not installed on your computer, you are

prompted to install it.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 143

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Click the printer that you want to install from the list of avail-
able printers that is displayed in the iPrint web page.
• The selected printer driver is installed on your computer.

Uninstalling Client Utilities Software

The following instructions describe how to uninstall the client software. The uninstalla-
tion procedure is different how you installed the client software.
P.144 "When Installed Using the Installer"
P.148 "When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard"

When Installed Using the Installer

When the client software was installed using the Installer in the Client Utilities CD-ROM
or downloaded from TopAccess, you can delete all files using the Add/Remove Pro-
grams function.
You can uninstall all client software that have installed from the Client Utilities CD-ROM,
or you can uninstall only the components that you want to remove.
P.144 "Uninstalling all Client Utilities Software"
P.146 "Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove"

Uninstalling all Client Utilities Software

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows are used.

NOTE: Before uninstalling the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon.

1. Open “Control Panel” and double-click the “Add/Remove

Programs” icon.

• The Add/Remove Programs dialog box appears.

144 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Select “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series Client” and click

[Change/Remove].

• The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Select “Remove” and click [Next].

• The Confirm Uninstall dialog box appears.

4. Click [OK].

5. Click [Yes] to delete the setting files.

• Deleting files starts.

NOTE: If you want to re-install the client software later, click [No] to remain the setting files.
You can restore the data and settings when you re-install the client software.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 145

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. Select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click

[Finish] to restart your computer.

• Some files may be deleted after restarting the computer.

Uninstalling only the components that you want to remove

The following describes an installation on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows are used.

NOTE: Before uninstalling the software, please make sure you exit TopAccessDocMon.

1. Open “Control Panel” and double-click the “Add/Remove

Programs” icon.

• The Add/Remove Programs dialog box appears.

146 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Select “TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series Client” and click

[Change/Remove].

• The InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.

3. Select “Modify” and click [Next].

4. Uncheck the components that you want to uninstall and click

[Next].

• Deleting files starts.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 147

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Click [Finish].

NOTE: If you select all components to be uninstalled, the Installer may ask you to restart your
computer. If it does, select “Yes, I want to restart my computer now.” and click [Finish]
to restart your computer.

When Installed Using Add Printer Wizard

If only printer drivers are installed by Add Printer Wizard or Point and Print, you can
uninstall them by deleting the printer icons from the Printers folder.

Deleting printer drivers

1. Open “Printers” folder, select the printer icon that you want
to delete, and press the [Delete] key.
• When using Windows 98/Me or Windows NT 4.0, uninstallation has finished.
• When using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, continue to the next step.

2. Click the [File] menu and select [Server Properties].

• The Print Server Properties dialog box appears.

148 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Display the Drivers tab. Select the printer drivers that you
want to delete, and click [Remove].

• The confirmation dialog box appears.

4. Click [OK].

• The printer drivers are completely deleted.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Windows 149

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing Client Software for Macintosh

Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on Macintosh
computers.
P.150 "About Client Software for Macintosh"
P.150 "Planning for Installation"
P.150 "Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"
P.156 "Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x"

About Client Software for Macintosh

PostScript Printer Description File
The Macintosh PPD (PostScript Printer Description) file contains information about con-
troller-specific features. There are two PPD files provided in the Client Utilities CD-
ROM: one is for Mac OS 8.6/9.x and the other is for Mac OS X.
Information within the PPD file for Mac OS 8.6/9.x works in conjunction with the stan-
dard Macintosh LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8.6.5 (or later). This Macintosh
PPDs are supplied for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x and it also supports Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Clas-
sic mode.
Information within the PPD file for Mac OS X works in conjunction with the Print Center
on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x.

Planning for Installation

System Requirements
To install the printer drivers on a Mac OS computer, the following environment is
required.
Display Resolution: 1028 x 768 dots or more
OS: Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x, Mac OS X 10.1 (Classic), Mac OS X
10.2 (Classic)
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x
Protocol: TCP/IP, AppleTalk (Ethernet), Rendezvous
Printer Driver: LaserWriter 8 printer driver version 8.6.5 or later
(not required for Mac OS X)

NOTE: Mac OS X 10.2 and its earlier versions of Mac OS X are supported in Classic mode
using the PPD file for Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x. This equipment also provides the PPD file for
Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x.

Installing the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

Installing the Macintosh PPD File

The Macintosh PPD file that is provided in the Client Utilities CD-ROM can be installed
by copying it to the System Folder: Extensions: Printer Descriptions folder.
This PPD file supports printing from Mac OS X 8.6 or 9.x, and these operating systems
running on the Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic Mode.

150 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Copying the PPD file to Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and
open your language folder in the “Client:MacPPD:OS9”
folder.
2. Copy the Stufflt file (TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO451cSeries.sit) to
the desktop, and extract the Macintosh PPD file.
NOTE: To extract the file, the Stufflt utility must be installed on your computer. For instructions
on how to extract the file, refer to your StuffIt documentation.

3. Double-click the boot drive icon and open the “System

Folder:Extensions:Printer Descriptions” folder.
4. Select and drag the Macintosh PPD file that you extracted to
the “Printer Descriptions” folder.
5. Continue the procedure for configuring the printer.
P.151 "Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"

Configuring the Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

After you copy the PPD file to the Printer Descriptions folder in the System Folder, you
can configure the printer.
This equipment supports two types of Macintosh Printing Service: LPR Printing or
AppleTalk Printing.
• LPR Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP/IP network, you
can enable LPR printing from Macintosh computer.
• AppleTalk Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network,
you can enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer.

Configuring Macintosh LPR printing

NOTE: Before installing the printer driver for LPR printing on Macintosh, check with your sys-
tem administrator to make sure of the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The TCP/IP setting is correct.
- LPD Printing Service is enabled on this equipment.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 151

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Start the Desktop Printer Utility.

• The folder containing the Desktop Printer Utility differs depending on the Mac
OS version. If you cannot locate the Desktop Printer Utility, search it in the
boot disk.
• The New Desktop Printer dialog box appears.

2. Make sure “LaserWriter 8” is selected in the “With” drop

down menu, select “Printer (LPR)” and click [OK].

• The Macintosh LPR Printer Selection dialog box opens.

3. Click [Change...] in the PostScript Printer Description (PPD)

File area.

• The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears.

4. Select the PPD file (TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO451cSeries) for the

equipment and click [Select].

152 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Click [Change...] in the LPR Printer Selection area.

• The Internet Printer dialog box appears.

6. Enter the IP Address of this equipment in the “Printer

Address” field and “Print” in the “Queue” field. Then click
[OK].

7. Click [Create...].

8. Enter the Desktop Printer name and click [Save].

• The printer is added to the desktop.

9. Double-click the desktop printer icon that you created.

• The Desktop Printer utility window opens.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 153

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click the [Printing] menu and select [Change Setup...].

• The LaserWriter setup dialog box appears.

11. Select each option item in the “Change” drop down menu
and select installed option in the “To” drop down menu
according to the configuration of this equipment.

z FInisher
Not Installed — Select this when no finisher is installed.
Single-Position Stapler — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher or Saddle-
stitch Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Multi-staple
Finisher or Saddle-stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.

NOTE: When you select “Multi-Position Stapler” or “Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch”, the
saddle-stitching function will be selectable for printing. However, saddle-stitching is
available only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.

z Drawer
Not Installed — Select this when no optional drawer is installed.
Drawer 3 — Select this when the drawer 3 is installed.
Drawer 3 & 4 — Select this when the drawer 3 and 4 are installed.
LCF — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.

NOTE: LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

12. Click [OK].

154 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing

NOTE: Before installing the printer driver for AppleTalk printing on Macintosh, check with your
system administrator to make sure of the following:
- This equipment is connected to the network and turned on.
- The AppleTalk settings is correct.

1. Click Apple menu and select [Chooser].

• The Chooser dialog box appears.

2. Select the LaserWriter 8 icon (and select the AppleTalk zone

if configured). Then select this equipment displayed in the
list, and click [Create].

• The Select a PostScript Printer Description File dialog box appears.

3. Select the PPD file (TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO451cSeries) for the

equipment and click [Select].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 155

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Select each option according to the configuration of this

equipment and click [OK].

z FInisher
Not Installed — Select this when no finisher is installed.
Single-Position Stapler — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher or Saddle-
stitch Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Multi-staple
Finisher or Saddle-stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.

NOTE: When you select “Multi-Position Stapler” or “Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch”, the
saddle-stitching function will be selectable for printing. However, saddle-stitching is
available only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.

z Drawer
Not Installed — Select this when no optional drawer is installed.
Drawer 3 — Select this when the drawer 3 is installed.
Drawer 3 & 4 — Select this when the drawer 3 and 4 are installed.
LCF — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.

NOTE: LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

5. Close the Chooser Dialog box.

• The Printer icon is created on the desktop.

Installing the Printer on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x

Install and configure the printer by the following steps:
P.156 "Installing the Macintosh PPD File"
P.159 "Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X"
P.165 "Configuring the Installable Options"

Installing the Macintosh PPD File

This equipment supports printing from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x.

Copying the PPD file to Mac OS X

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive and
open your language folder in the “Client:MacPPD:OSX”
folder.
2. Copy the GZ file (TOSHIBAeSTUDIO451cSeries.dmg.gz) to
the desktop.

156 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Double-click the GZ file on the desktop.

• The installer window appears.

4. Double-click the icon in the installer window.

• The Authenticate dialog box appears.

5. Enter the name and password, and click [OK].

• The welcome message is displayed.

6. Click [Continue].

• The Software License Agreement window is displayed.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 157

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

7. Click [Continue].

8. Click [Agree].

• The Select a Destination window is displayed.

9. Select the boot hard disk of your Mac OS X and click [Con-
tinue].

• The Easy Install window is displayed.

158 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

10. Click [Install] (or [Upgrade]).

• It start copying the PPD files for each language.

11. Click [Close] to close the installer window.

12. Delete the GZIP files and Installer files created from the desk-
top.
13. Continue the procedure for configuring the printer.
P.159 "Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X"

Configuring the Printer on Mac OS X

After you copy the PPD file to the library folder in the System Folder, you can configure
the printer.
This equipment supports the following Macintosh Printing Services: IP Printing, Apple-
Talk Printing, and IPP printing.
• IP Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP/IP network, you
can enable IP printing from Macintosh computer.
• AppleTalk Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over AppleTalk network,
you can enable AppleTalk printing from Macintosh computer.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 159

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

• IPP Printing
When this equipment and your computer are connected over TCP/IP network, you
can enable IPP printing from Macintosh computer.

Configuring Macintosh IP printing

1. Start the Print Center (for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or

Printer Setup Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located in the
“Applications:Utility” folder in the Boot Disk.

• The Printer List dialog box appears.

2. Click [Add].

3. Select “IP Printing” in the drop down box.

160 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Enter the IP address or DNS name of this equipment in the

“Printer’s Address” field.

5. Uncheck the “Use default queue on server” box and enter

“Print” in the “Queue Name” field.

6. Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Printer Model” drop down box, and

select the PPD file.

7. Click [Add].
• The printer is added to the Printer List.

8. Continue the procedure to configure the installable options.

P.165 "Configuring the Installable Options"

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 161

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Configuring Macintosh AppleTalk printing

1. Start the Print Center (for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or

Printer Setup Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located “Applica-
tions:Utility” folder in the Boot Disk.

• The Printer List dialog box appears.

2. Click [Add].

3. Select “AppleTalk” in the drop down box and select the zone
name that this equipment is located.

• If the AppleTalk network is not configured with a zone, select “Local Apple-
Talk zone”.

4. Select this equipment displayed in the list.

162 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

5. Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Printer Model” drop down box, and

select the PPD file.

6. Click [Add].
• The printer is added to the Printer List.

7. Continue the procedure to configure the installable options.

P.165 "Configuring the Installable Options"

Configuring Macintosh IPP Printing

When you want to setup IPP print queue in the Mac OS X, follow the procedures here.

When IPP SSL is enabled on the Equipment

When the IPP SSL is enabled on the equipment, you requires the following settings on
Mac OS X.
• OpenSSL should be installed
• CUPS should be configured with “--enable-ssl” option
• HTTPS symbol should be created in the “/usr/libexec/cups/backend” directory.
1. Run the Terminal in the “Utilities” folder and login with root privileges.
- Use ‘su’ or ‘sudo -s’ to login with root privileges.
2. Enter the following command:
cd /usr/libexec/cups/backend
3. Enter the following command:
ln -s ipp https
4. Restart the Mac OS X.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 163

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Start the Print Center (for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8) or

Printer Setup Utility (for Mac OS X 10.3.x), located in the
“Applications:Utility” folder in the Boot Disk.

• The Printer List dialog box appears.

2. Click [Add] by pressing the [option] button.

• This is mandatory to show all the advanced print option in the drop down box
in the Print List window.

3. Select “Advanced” in the drop down box and specify the

items as described below.

Device: Internet Printing Protocol (http)

Device Name: <Any Name>
Device URI: http://<IP address>:631/Print
Printer Model: TOSHIBA
PPD: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO451c Series PS (or UK PS)

NOTE: When IPP/SSL is enabled, specify as followings:

- Device: Internet Printing Protocol (https)
- Device URL: https://<IP address>:433/Print

4. Click [Add].
• The printer is added to the Printer List.

164 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Configuring the Installable Options

Users must configure the installable options before printing.

Configuring the installable options

1. In the Printer List dialog box, select the printer and, then,
select [Show Info] in the [Printers] menu.

• The Printer Info dialog box appears.

2. Select “Installable Options” in the drop down menu.

• The Installable Options window is displayed.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh 165

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Set the following options.

z Finisher
Not Installed — Select this if a finisher is not installed.
Single-Position Stapler — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher or Saddle-
stitch Finisher is installed.
Multi-Position Stapler and Hole Punch — Select this when the Multi-staple
Finisher or Saddle-stitch Finisher and Hole Punch unit are installed.
z Drawer
Not Installed — Select this when no optional drawer is installed.
Drawer 3 — Select this when the drawer 3 is installed.
Drawer 3 & 4 — Select this when the drawer 3 and 4 are installed.
LCF — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.

NOTE: LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

NOTE: If you are using the Mac OS X 10.3.0 or earlier, finisher options such as stapling and
hole punching can be selected even if you select “Not Installed” for the Finisher option.
If you select the finisher options for printing but the finisher is not installed, finisher set-
tings will be ignored and perform printing correctly.

4. Click [Apply Changes] and close the window.

166 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing Client Software for UNIX

Please refer to following instructions for configuring printing systems on UNIX worksta-
tions.
To setup the printing system on UNIX workstation, you can use UNIX filters or CUPS.

Setting Up the UNIX Filters

About UNIX Filters

In the Client Utilities CD-ROM, the following filters for UNIX workstations are included:

net_est451c
This file is a shell script that will be installed in “/usr/lib/lp/model”. It contains all the pars-
ing for the printer specific commands and it generates all the output code. Being a shell
script, a system administrator can modify it if a site requires any custom options or if
other components are installed in non-standard locations.

lpdsend
This is an executable program that is called by net_est451c to send the print file to the
system using the LPD protocol. This program will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”.

lpLinux.sh (Linux filter only)

This file is a shell script that simulates the command line functions of lp. After process-
ing the command line options, the e-STUDIO filter is invoked in the same way as a Sys-
tem V print filter. This file is installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link to this file
will be installed in the “/usr/local/bin” directory as lptap.

est451cBackend (AIX filter only)

This is an executable program that is called by the AIX qdaemon. It receives the argu-
ments from the qdaemon, interrogates it for copy information etc. then calls the queues'
copy of net_est451c to run the print. This program will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/
bin”.

est451cadd
This file is a shell script that is used to create a printer description. This file will be
installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link will be installed in the “/bin” directory
that will point to the actual location of this file.

est451crm
This file is a shell script that is used to remove a printer description. This file will be
installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/bin”. A symbolic link will be installed in the “/bin” directory
that will point to the actual location of this file.

est451c.1
This is an input file for the man command that supplies online documentation for the
printer specific options. This file will be installed in “/opt/toshiba/tap/man/man1”. A sym-
bolic link will be installed in the /usr/man/man1 directory that will point to the actual loca-
tion of this file.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 167

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Planning for Installation

— System Requirements
For UNIX workstation, the following environment is required.
OS: Sun Solaris v2.5.1/2.6/2.7/7.8/8/9
HP-UX Version 10.20/11.x
IBM AIX 4.1.5/4.3.3/5L
SCO UNIXWare 7
SCO OpenUNIX 8
Red Hat Linux 6.2/7.1/7.2/7.3/8.0
SuSE Linux ver 7.0/8.1
Mandrake Linux ver 7.1/9
Turbo Linux 8
Protocol: TCP/IP
Module: Python must be installed.

NOTE: The “Python” module must be installed on your UNIX workstation to enable printing.
The “Python” module is usually installed in the “/usr/bin/” directory. Check this directory
whether the “Python” module is installed.

Configuring UNIX Printing Using UNIX Filters

When you want to configure the UNIX printing using the UNIX filters, install the UNIX fil-
ters and configure the LPR queue.

— Installing the UNIX Filters

UNIX Filters are provided as TAR files for each Operating System. You can install them
by copying the TAR file into the root directory and extract the file.

Copying the UNIX filters

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Log on to the root account and copy the TAR file onto the
root.
• A TAR file for each operating system is included in following folders:
For Solaris: [CD-ROM]/Admin/solarisfilter/usa/
For HP-UX:[CD-ROM]/Admin/hp-uxfilter/usa/
For AIX:[CD-ROM]/Admin/aixfilter/usa/
For Linux: [CD-ROM]/Admin/linuxfilter/usa/
For OpenUNIX: [CD-ROM]/Admin/openunixfilter/usa/

3. Enter the following command and check the output:

z For Solaris:
uname -a
Output on screen should be:
SunOS
z For HP-UX:
uname -a
Output on screen should be:
HP-UX

168 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

z For IBM AIX:

uname -a
Output on screen should be:
AIX
z For Linux:
uname -a
Output on screen should be:
Linux
z For OpenUNIX:
uname -a
Output on screen should be:
OpenUNIX

NOTE: If the output is not as above, ask your administrator.

4. Change to the root directory.

5. Enter the following command:
z For Solaris:
tar xvf solaris.tar
z For HP-UX:
tar xvf hpux.tar
z For IBM AIX:
tar xvf aix.tar
z For Linux:
tar xvf linux.tar
z For OpenUNIX:
tar xvf openunix.tar

6. The command extracts all the required files and installs them
in the correct locations. Continue the procedure for config-
uring the print queue.
P.169 "Configuring the Print Queue"

— Configuring the Print Queue

After you copy UNIX Filters, you can configure the print queue.
There are two ways to configure the print queue: one is creating a print queue using
est451cadd, and the other is creating a print queue manually without using est451cadd.
P.169 "Creating a Print Queue Using est451cadd"
P.170 "Creating a Print Queue Manually"

Creating a Print Queue Using est451cadd

You can create a print queue using est451cadd.

Creating a print queue

1. Log on to the root account.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 169

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Enter the following command:

est451cadd <queue name> <host name or IP address>

SUPPLEMENTS: • This command creates a print queue using the system’s lpadmin command. It also
creates a configuration file that has the destination IP address or host name. Use
the configuration file to change print queue parameters.
• The lpadmin command stores the printer interface file in the /etc/lp/interfaces direc-
tory in a file with the same name as the print queue. The configuration file is stored
in the /etc/lp/interfaces directory in a file named <queue name>.conf.
• Under Linux, the printtool (or equivalent) utility must be used to add the printer into
the lp printing system after executing the est bwadd command.

Creating a Print Queue Manually

You can also configure the print queue by adding a remote printer manually.
The procedure varies depending on the operating systems.
P.170 "Creating a print queue manually on Solaris"
P.171 "Creating a print queue manually on HP-UX"
P.171 "Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX"
P.172 "Creating a print queue manually on Linux"
P.173 "Creating a print queue manually on OpenUNIX"

Creating a print queue manually on Solaris

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Open your Linux/UNIX editor.
3. Create the following file.
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

4. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.

dest=<IP address>

5. Save the file.

6. Enter the following command:
chmod +x <queue name>.conf

7. Enter the following command:

chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf

8. Enter the following command:

lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_est451c

9. Enter the following command:

accept <queue name>

10. Enter the following command:

enable <queue name>

170 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Creating a print queue manually on HP-UX

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Open your Linux/UNIX editor.
3. Create the following file.
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

4. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.

dest=<IP address>

5. Save the file.

6. Enter the following command:
chmod +x <queue name>.conf

7. Enter the following command:

chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf

8. Enter the following command:

ps -ef | grep lpsched | grep -iv grep > /dev/null 2>&1

9. Enter the following command:

Echo $?

10. If “0” is outputted on the screen, turn the scheduler OFF.

Enter the following command:
/usr/sbin/lpshut > /dev/null 2>&1

11. Enter the following command:

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null \
-m net_est451c -o rm <queue name> -orpdssc -ob3

12. Enter the following command:

accept <queue name>

13. Enter the following command:

enable <queue name>

14. If you turn OFF the scheduler in step 10, turn the scheduler
ON. Enter the following command:
/usr/lpsched > /dev/null 2>&1

Creating a print queue manually on IBX AIX

1. Enter the following command:

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/filter

2. If the above directory does not exist, enter the following

command:
mkdir /opt/toshiba/tap/filter

3. Log on to the root account.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 171

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Open your Linux/UNIX editor.

5. Create the following file.
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

6. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.

dest=<IP address>

7. Save the file.

8. Enter the following command:
mkque -q <queue name> \
-a s_statfilter = /usr/lib/lpd/bsdshort \
-a up = TRUE -a host = <IP address> -a rq = dssc

9. Enter the following command:

mkquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name> \
-a backend = /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/est451cBackend

10. Enter the following command:

cp /usr/lib/lpd/pio/predef/net_est451c \
/opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>

Creating a print queue manually on Linux

1. Enter the following command:

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/interface

2. If the above directory does not exist, enter the following

command:
mkdir /opt/toshiba/tap/interface

3. As root open your Linux/UNIX editor.

4. Open your Linux/UNIX editor.
5. Create the following file.
/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>.conf

6. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.

dest=<IP address>

7. Save the file.

8. Enter the following command:
cp /opt/toshiba/tap/model/net_est451c \
/opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>

9. Enter the following command:

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/modPrintcap \
-a <queue name> <IP address>

10. Enter the following command:

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>

172 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

11. If the above file exists, enter the following command.

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/printconf_import \
–a <queue name> IP_ADDRESS \
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>

12. Restart your lpd.

Creating a print queue manually on OpenUNIX

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Open your Linux/UNIX editor.
3. Create the following file.
/etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

4. Add a line as below in the <queue name>.conf.

dest=<IP address>

5. Save the file.

6. Enter the following command:
chmod +x <queue name>.conf

7. Enter the following command:

chown lp:lp <queue name>.conf

8. Enter the following command:

lpadmin -p <queue name> -v /dev/null -I any \
-i /usr/lib/lp/model/net_est451c

9. Enter the following command:

accept <queue name>

10. Enter the following command:

enable <queue name>

— Changing the Default Values

You can change the default values of a print queue by the following procedure.

Changing the default values of a print queue

1. Study the interface file, named <queue name>, stored in the /

etc/lp/interfaces directory.
• This file contains all of the default settings and values that can be set. These
values are case sensitive and must conform to the /bin/sh variable format.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 173

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. To manually edit the configuration file (/etc/lp/interfaces/

<queue name>.conf), add a line that consists of the parame-
ter and value.
• For example, to change the default orientation to Landscape, add the follow-
ing line:
orient= “LANDSCAPE”

— Deleting the Print Queue

There are two ways to delete the print queue: one is deleting a print queue using
est451crm, and the other is deleting a print queue manually without using est451crm.
P.174 "Deleting a Print Queue Using est451crm"
P.174 "Deleting a Print Queue Manually"

Deleting a Print Queue Using est451crm

When you want to delete the queue using est451crm, perform the following procedure.

Deleting a print queue

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Enter the following command:
est451crm <queue name>

SUPPLEMENTS: • This command uses the system’s lpadmin command to delete the print queue and
configuration file.
• Please restart the lpd under Linux.

Deleting a Print Queue Manually

You can also configure the print queue by adding a print queue manually.
The procedure varies depending on the operating systems.
P.174 "Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris"
P.174 "Deleting a print queue manually on HP-UX"
P.175 "Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX"
P.175 "Deleting a print queue manually on Linux"
P.176 "Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUNIX"

Deleting a print queue manually on Solaris

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Enter the following command:
lpadmin -x <queue name>

3. Enter the following command:

rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

Deleting a print queue manually on HP-UX

1. Log on to the root account.

174 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

2. Enter the following command:

ps –ef | grep lpsched | grep –iv grep > /dev/null 2>&1

3. Enter the following command:

Echo $?

4. If “0” outputted on the screen, turn the scheduler OFF. Enter

the following command:
/usr/sbin/lpshut > /dev/null 2>&1

5. Enter the following command:

/usr/sbin/lpadmin -x <queue name>

6. Enter the following command:

rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

7. If “0” was outputted on the screen in step 3, turn the sched-

uler ON. Enter the following command:
/usr/sbin/lpsched > /dev/null 2>&1

Deleting a print queue manually on IBM AIX

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Enter the following command:
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>

3. Enter the following command:

rm /opt/oshiba/tap/filter/<queue name>.conf

4. Enter the following command:

rmquedev -q <queue name> -d dev_<queue name>

5. Enter the following command:

rmque -q <queue name>

Deleting a print queue manually on Linux

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Enter the following command:
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>

3. Enter the following command:

rm /opt/toshiba/tap/interface/<queue name>.conf

4. Enter the following command:

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/modPrintcap -d <queue name>

5. Enter the following command:

ls /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 175

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

6. If the above file exists, enter the following command:

/opt/toshiba/tap/bin/printconf_import \
–d <queue name> \
rm /opt/toshiba/tap/bin/flag_<queue name>

7. Restart your lpd.

Deleting a print queue manually on OpenUNIX

1. Log on to the root account.

2. Enter the following command:
lpadmin -x <queue name>

3. Enter the following command:

rm /etc/lp/interfaces/<queue name>.conf

Setting Up the CUPS

When you want to configure the UNIX printing using CUPS, you can use LPR printing
or IPP printing.

This section describes the behavior, options, and installation method of the CUPS
printer driver for the equipment. The behavior of the printer driver presented in this
specification is consistent with CUPS v1.1.15. The driver may appear and/or operate
slightly differently in the different versions.

In reality, the file supplied in this package is not really a printer driver it is actually a
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file.

Development Environment
The provided CUPS printer driver is supported on the following UNIX workstation.
• Redhat 8.0 CUPS 1.1.18
• Turbo Linux 8.0 CUPS 1.1.14
• Suse 8.1 CUPS 1.1.15.

All of the options worked correctly on Redhat 8.0 but the UI Constraints did not work
correctly on Suse 8.1 or Turbo Linux 8.0 this is because they ship with older versions of
CUPS.

Implementation Method
This driver consists of a PPD file that works in conjunction with an interface like XPP,
KPrinter, etc. It can also be used on OSX in the same way that it is used on Linux, but
this is not recommended.

Supplied Components
There is one supplied component, a PPD file called “TOSHIBA_EST451c_CUPS.gz”. It
has been compressed using gzip. It does not need to be uncompressed for Linux to use
the PPD file and so it should be left compressed.

The user needs root privileges to place the PPD file in the default location. The default
location for the standard CUPS PPD files is:
/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba

176 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

About CUPS
This section describes the behavior, options, and installation method of the CUPS
printer driver for the equipment. The behavior of the printer driver presented in this
specification is consistent with CUPS v1.1.15. The driver may appear and/or operate
slightly differently in the different versions.

In reality, the file supplied in this package is not really a printer driver it is actually a
PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file.

Development Environment
The provided CUPS printer driver is supported on the following UNIX workstation.
• Redhat 8.0 CUPS 1.1.18
• Turbo Linux 8.0 CUPS 1.1.14
• Suse 8.1 CUPS 1.1.15.

All of the options worked correctly on Redhat 8.0 but the UI Constraints did not work
correctly on Suse 8.1 or Turbo Linux 8.0 this is because they ship with older versions of
CUPS.

Implementation Method
This driver consists of a PPD file that works in conjunction with an interface like XPP,
KPrinter, etc. It can also be used on OSX in the same way that it is used on Linux, but
this is not recommended.

Supplied Components
There is one supplied component, a PPD file called “TOSHIBA_EST451c_CUPS.gz”. It
has been compressed using gzip. It does not need to be uncompressed for Linux to use
the PPD file and so it should be left compressed.

The user needs root privileges to place the PPD file in the default location. The default
location for the standard CUPS PPD files is:
/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba

Configuring UNIX Printing Using CUPS

You can configure the CUPS for LPR printing or IPP printing.

— Installing the CUPS for LPR Printing

The PPD must first be copied onto the local machine, the printer installed, and then the
PPD configured. The printer is then installed and configured using CUPS via the
browser.

The PPD is placed in the “/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba” directory (which will require

root privileges and the Toshiba directory may need to be created). The PPD can be
simply copied to the appropriate directory and the CUPS daemon re-started.

Installing the CUPS for LPR printing

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Log on to the root account and create “Toshiba” directory in
the “usr/share/cups/model” directory.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 177

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Copy the GZIP file into the “usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba”

directory or enter the following command:
cp TOSHIBA_EST451c_CUPS.gz /usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba

• A GZIP file is included in the “Admin/CUPS/USA” folder in the CD-ROM.

4. Enter the following command:

service lpd stop

NOTE: If lpd is already stopped, “Failed” will be displayed.

• When using the Red Hat Linux, continue to the next step.
• When using other than the Red Hat Linux, skip to step 10.

5. When using the Red Hat Linux, enter the following com-
mand:
/usr/bin/redhat-switch-printer

• The redhat-switch-printer dialog box appears.

6. Select “CUPS” and click [OK].

• The information dialog box appears.

7. Click [OK].
8. Enter the following command:
service cups start

9. Enter the following command:

/usr/bin/cupsconfig

• The Common UNIX Printing System page appears. Skip to step 11.

10. Open the browser and locate CUPS by typing

“http://local host:631/” in the address field.
• The Common UNIX Printing System page appears.

11. Click the “Manage Printers” link.

• The Printer page is displayed.

178 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

12. Click [Add Printer].

• The Admin page is displayed.

13. Enter the printer name, location, and description of the

printer in each field and click [Continue].

• If a new printer name is a duplicate of a name already in the printer list, the
new printer will replace the original printer.

14. Select “LPD/LPR Host or Printer” at the “Device” drop down

box and click [Continue].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 179

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

15. Enter the “lpd://<IP address>/Print” in the “Device URI” field

and click [Continue].

NOTE: Make sure to capitalize the “P” in “Print” for the device URI.

16. Select “TOSHIBA” at the “Make” list and click [Continue].

NOTE: If you do not see “TOSHIBA” in the “Make” list, restart CUPS.

17. Select the PPD in the “Model” list and click [Continue].

180 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

18. The page shows that the printer has been installed correctly.
Click the printer name link.

19. Click [Configure Printer] to selects the options installed.

20. Change the settings in the “Options Installed” area, and click
[Continue] in each area to save settings.

NOTE: In this page, you can configure the print options as well. The setting items are same as
the Mac OS X Page Setup dialog and Print dialog. For the information about each print
option, please see the following section.
P.277 "Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x"

— Installing the CUPS for IPP Printing

When you want to setup IPP print queue in the Linux OS, follow the procedures here.

When IPP SSL is enabled on the Equipment

When the IPP SSL is enabled on the equipment, you requires the following settings on
Linux OS.
• OpenSSL should be installed
• CUPS should be configured with “--enable-ssl” option
• HTTPS symbol should be created in the “/usr/lib/cups/backend” directory.
1. Open the console and login with root privileges.
- Use ‘su’ or ‘sudo -s’ to login with root privileges.
2. Enter the following command:
cd /usr/lib/cups/backend
3. Enter the following command:
ln -s ipp https

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 181

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Restart the CUPS Service in Linux.

• IPP/SSL certificates in the “/etc/cups” directory should be created
1. Enter the following command:
mkdir ssl folder in /etc/cups
2. Enter the following command:
openssl reg -new -x509 \
-keyout /etc/cups/ssl/server.key \
-out /etc/cups/ssl/server.crt -days 365 -nodes
3. Enter the following command:
chmod 600 /etc/cups/ssl/server.*
* The “-nodes” option prevents the certificate and key from being encrypted.
The cupsd process runs in the background, detached from any input source;
if you encrypt these files then cupsd will not be able to load them.
4. Add the following lines in the cupsd.conf file in /etc/cups path.
SSLPort 443
ServerCertificate /etc/cups/ssl/server.crt
ServerKey /etc/cups/ssl/server.key
5. Run the following command on the shell to restart the CUPS Server.
Service cups restart

Add IPP Printer

IPP printing from Linux OS is done from the CUPS server as a backend.

1. Insert the Client Utilities CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive.

2. Log on to the root account and create “Toshiba” directory in
the “usr/share/cups/model” directory.
3. Copy the GZIP file into the “usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba”
directory or enter the following command:
cp TOSHIBA_EST451c_CUPS.gz /usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba

• A GZIP file is included in the “Admin/CUPS/USA” folder in the CD-ROM.

4. Enter the following command:

service lpd stop

NOTE: If lpd is already stopped, “Failed” will be displayed.

• When using the Red Hat Linux, continue to the next step.
• When using other than the Red Hat Linux, skip to step 10.

5. When using the Red Hat Linux, enter the following com-
mand:
/usr/bin/redhat-switch-printer

• The redhat-switch-printer dialog box appears.

6. Select “CUPS” and click [OK].

• The information dialog box appears.

7. Click [OK].

182 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

8. Enter the following command:

service cups start

9. Enter the following command:

/usr/bin/cupsconfig

• The Common UNIX Printing System page appears. Skip to step 11.

10. Open the browser and locate CUPS by typing

“http://local host:631/” in the address field.
• The Common UNIX Printing System page appears.

NOTE: When IPP/SSL is enabled, specify “http://local host:433/” in the address field to access
the Common UNIX Printing System.

11. Add a new https printer by clicking [Add Printer].

Configure the parameters as:
Name: <Any Name>
Location: <Optional>
Description: <Optional>
Device: Internet Printing Protocol (http)
Device URL: http://<IP address>:631/Print
Model/Driver: TOSHIBA

NOTE: When IPP/SSL is enabled, specify as followings:

- Device: Internet Printing Protocol (https)
- Device URL: https://<IP address>:433/Print

SUPPLEMENT: Using CUPS Client (print commands lp, lpr, etc.) with -e option, the connection can be
encrypted and printing can be done in the above configured printer.

— Modifying or Configuring Printer

You can modify or configure the printer that you create.

Modifying Printer

You can change the location and description of the printer.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 183

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

1. Click the “Manage Printers” link in the startup page.

• The Printer page is displayed.

2. Click [Modify Printer].

3. Modify the location and description in each field and click

[Continue].

184 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Configuring Printer

You can set the print options that applied for the print jobs using CUPS.

1. Click the “Manage Printers” link in the startup page.

• The Printer page is displayed.

2. Click [Configure Printer].

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 185

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. You can configure the print options in the displayed page.

The setting items are same as the Mac OS X Page Setup dia-
log and Print dialog. For the information about each print
option, please see the following section.
P.277 "Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x"

— Uninstalling Printer
To uninstall the printer that you create, perform the following procedure.

186 Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Uninstalling Printer

1. Click the “Manage Printers” link in the startup page.

• The Printer page is displayed.

2. Click [Delete Printer].

• The printer is deleted.

3. Then delete the PPD file “TOSHIBA_EST451c_CUPS.gz”

from the “/usr/share/cups/model/Toshiba” directory.

Printing Guide — Installing Client Software for UNIX 187

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Other Installation Procedures

Installing Client Software from TopAccess
If the system administrator has uploaded the driver software to this equipment, you can
use TopAccess to install the software on your workstation.

Installing client software from TopAccess for Windows

1. In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of

the screen.

• The Install Client Software page opens.

2. Click the “Install Client1” link to download the installer file.

3. Download the installer file on your desktop by following the

prompts.
4. Double-click the “InstallClient1.exe” file that you down-
loaded.
• The installer starts and the InstallShield Wizard dialog box appears.

5. Follow the installation procedure using the Client Utilities

CD-ROM described in following section.
P.20 "Installing Client Software for Windows"

188 Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

Installing client software from TopAccess for Macintosh

1. In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of

the screen.

• The Install Client Software page opens.

2. Click the “Macintosh PPD Files” link.

• The software components list is displayed.

3. Click the File Name link that you want to download.

TOSHIBA_e-STUDIO451cSeries.sit — Click this link to download the PPD file

for Mac OS 8.6/9.x and Mac OS X 10.1/10.2 Classic mode.
TOSHIBAeSTUDIO451cSeries.dmg.gz — Click this link to download the PPD
file for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x.

Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures 189

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

4. Download the PPD file of your Mac OS version on your desk-

top by following the prompts.
5. After you download the PPD file, refer to the installation pro-
cedure for Macintosh to set up the printer.
P.150 "Installing Client Software for Macintosh"

Installing client software from TopAccess for UNIX

1. In TopAccess, click the Install Software link at the bottom of

the screen.

• The Install Client Software page opens.

2. Click the “Unix Filters” link.

• The software components list is displayed.

190 Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

3. Click the UNIX filter link that you want to install.

4. Download the UNIX tar file containing the UNIX filters on your
desktop by following the prompts.
5. After you download the UNIX tar file, refer to the installation
procedure for UNIX to set up the printer.
P.167 "Installing Client Software for UNIX"

Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures 191

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 2. Installing Client Software

192 Printing Guide — Other Installation Procedures

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

PRINTING
3.

This describes the instructions on how to print from client computer.

• Printing from Windows.................................................................................................................194
• Printing from Macintosh...............................................................................................................261
• Printing from UNIX ........................................................................................................................298
• Other Printing Methods ................................................................................................................313

Printing Guide 193

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Printing from Windows

This equipment supports printing from Windows applications using the PCL6, PCL5c,
and PS3 printer drivers.
These printer drivers allow you to define such document properties as the orientation
and print quality of your pages, and such complex finishing options as booklet layout
and multi-position stapling.

Before Using the Printer Driver

Before printing, you have to configure the following options:
• Configuration Settings
You have to configure such options as optional drawers, finisher, and hole punch
unit. The features of these optional devices are not available unless you tell the
system that the optional devices are installed.
• Department Code
This system can manage jobs by department code. This feature lets you manage
job counters for every department code. For example, a network administrator can
check the number of copies printed from specific department member.
If the Department Code is enabled, enter your Department Code provided by your
administrator.

Configuring the Options

After you complete the installation of the printer drivers, you should configure the option
settings on the printer drivers.
There are two methods to configure the options;
• If this equipment and your computer are not connected in the TCP/IP network, you
can configure the options manually.
P.195 "Configuring the Options Manually"
• If this equipment and your computer are connected in the TCP/IP network, you can
configure the options automatically obtaining the settings using the SNMP Commu-
nication.
P.196 "Configuring the Options Automatically"

NOTES: • When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows 98/Me, you
must click [Update Now] in the [Configuration] tab before starting to use for printing.
• When the printer drivers are installed using Point and Print on Windows NT 4.0/
2000/XP/Server 2003 and the option settings are changed in the [Configuration] tab,
the changes that are made in the [Configuration] tab will not be made available
when printing from the application unless you change and apply one of the settings
in the print options that are shown in the [Printing Default] button in the [Advanced]
tab (for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003) or the [Document Default] command in the
[File] menu (for Windows NT 4.0). After you change one of the settings, the
changes that you made in the [Configuration] tab will be correctly applied.
The following procedure describes how to make the changes that you made in the
[Configuration] tab available from the application. The operation varies depending
on the operating system.

For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003

1. After you change the option settings in the [Configuration] tab, display the
[Advanced] tab and click [Printing Default].
2. Change one of the settings. (For example, change “Number of Copies”.)
3. Click [OK] to save changes. Now, the changes that you made in the [Configuration]
tab apply correctly in the printer driver.
4. If required, click [Printing Default] in the [Advanced] tab and restore the setting that
you changed in Step 2 to the original value and click [OK].

194 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

For Windows NT 4.0

1. After you change the option settings in the [Configuration] tab, click [OK] to close the
Properties dialog box.
2. Select the printer driver and select [Document Defaults] in the [File] menu.
3. Change one of the settings. (For example, change “Number of Copies”.)
4. Click [OK] to save changes. Now, the changes that you made in the [Configuration]
tab apply correctly in the printer driver.
5. If required, select [Document Defaults] in the [File] menu and restore the setting that
you changed in Step 3 to the original value and click [OK].

— Configuring the Options Manually

The following describes an instruction on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows are used.

Setting the configuration tab manually

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.

1. Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click

[File] and select [Properties].

• When you are operating under Windows XP/Server 2003, open the Printers
and Faxes folder to access the printer driver.
• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 195

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2. Display the [Configuration] tab and set the following options.

Pedestal — This sets whether the drawer 3, drawers 3 & 4, or large capacity
feeder (not available for some countries or regions) are installed.
Finisher — This sets whether or not optional finisher is installed.
Hole Punch Unit — This sets whether or not optional hole punch unit is
installed.
Drawer 1/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is
loaded in the 1st Drawer.
Drawer 2/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is
loaded in the 2nd Drawer.
Drawer 3/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is
loaded in the 3rd Drawer when it is installed.
Drawer 4/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper that is
loaded in the 4th Drawer when it is installed.
Large Capacity/Paper Type — Select the paper size and paper type of paper
that is loaded in the Large Capacity Feeder when it is installed.
Bypass Feeder — Select the paper type of paper that is loaded in the Stack
Feed Bypass.
Memory — Select the size of memory.

NOTE: LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

SUPPLEMENT: For more information about each item, see descriptions about the Configuration Tab.
P.237 "Configuration Tab"

3. Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.

— Configuring the Options Automatically

The following describes an instruction on Windows 2000. The procedure is the same
when other versions of Windows are used.

196 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Setting the configuration tab using SNMP communication

NOTE: You must log into Windows as a user who has the “Administrators” or “Power Users”
privilege when using Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows
Server 2003.

1. Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click

[File] and select [Properties].

• When you are operating under Windows XP/Server 2003, open the Printers
and Faxes folder to access the printer driver.
• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

2. Display the [Configuration] tab, check on “Enable SNMP

Communication”, and click [Update Now].

• The printer driver starts communicating with system and obtains option set-
tings automatically.

NOTE: If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message “The
address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be displayed.
If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the equipment using the TopAccessDocMon
Local Discovery dialog box. After searching the equipment, the SNMP communication
will be enabled. For the instructions on how to search the equipment, refer to the
instructions of TopAccessDocMon.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 197

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3. If you want to update option settings automatically when the

[Configuration] tab is opened, check on “Update Automati-
cally”.

4. Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.

SUPPLEMENT: For more information about each item, see descriptions about the Configuration Tab.

Setting the Department Code

When this equipment is managed by department codes, you have to enter your depart-
ment code on the printer driver.
This allows a network administrator to check the number of copies printed from specific
department members. Also users can check to see who submitted the print jobs, by
using the Touch Panel Display and monitoring tools.
Please ask your administrator whether or not you should enter the Department Code.

NOTES: • When the User Authentication is enabled on the equipment, the User Authentication
is used to manage the print jobs instead of the department code. In that case, the
user name that is entered to login to your computer is used for the authentication of
the print job. Therefore, you do not need to enter the department code in the printer
driver but your user name must be registered in the equipment. If the user name is
not registered, your print job is proceeded as the invalid job according to the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement settings.
• If the No Limit Black function is enabled, you do not have to specify the department
code when you print a document with selecting “Mono” in the “Color” option in the
Setup tab of printer driver.

198 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

SUPPLEMENTS: • How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which
no department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on
the Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Adminis-
trator mode and whether the SNMP Communication is enabled or not. When the
SNMP Communication is enabled and Department Code Enforcement is set to
“ON”, an error message will be displayed when entering the invalid department
code. When the SNMP Communication is disabled and Department Code Enforce-
ment is set to “ON”, the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid
department code print job list without printing. When the Department Code Enforce-
ment is set to “Print”, the invalid department code print job will be printed. When the
Department Code Enforcement is set to “Delete”, the invalid department code print
job will be deleted without printing.
However, when using Windows NT 4.0 and configure the connection through a Net-
Ware print server, an error message for entering the invalid department code will not
be displayed even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Commu-
nication is enabled.
• A department code can be entered every time you begin printing. If you have to use
a different department code for each print job, enter it when you begin printing.

Entering department code

1. Select the printer driver in the Printers folder. Then click

[File] and select [Properties] (for Windows 98/Me), select
[Document Defaults...] (for Windows NT 4.0), or [Printing
Preferences...] (for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).

• The printer driver properties dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 199

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2. Display the [Print Job] tab and enter your department code in
the “Department” field.

• In the Department field, only numeric characters can be entered. The

Department Code must be 5-digit number.

3. Click [Apply] and [OK] to save settings.

Copying the PPD File for Windows

The Client Utilities CD-ROM contains a printer description file for popular Windows
applications. PageMaker 6.0, 6.5, and 7.0 do not support automatic installation of
printer description files. To make printing available in the Print and Page Setup dialog
boxes of this application, copy the printer description file to the appropriate location.

Copying the printer description file

1. On the Client Utilities CD-ROM, open the folder that contains

the PS3 printer driver.
• For Windows 98/Me:
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\9X_ME\PS\<language>\
• For Windows NT 4.0:
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\NT\PS\<language>\
• For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003:
[Client Utilities CD-ROM]:\Client\W2K_XP_2003\PS\<language>\

2. Copy the printer description file (*.ppd) to the appropriate

location.
• For PageMaker 6.0:
\PM6\RSRC\<language>\PPD4
• For PageMaker 6.5:
\PM65\RSRC\<language>\PPD4
• For PageMaker 7.0:
\Program Files\Adobe\PageMaker 7.0\Rsrc\<language>\PPD4

200 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTE: You can select the high resolution setting (such as “Color High-res General”) for the
Color Resolution Type in the Print dialog box even if the optional expansion memory is
not installed. In that case, the print job will not be printed.

Printing from Application

Considerations and Limitations

• When the User Authentication is enabled on the equipment, the user name that is
entered to login to your computer is used for the authentication of the print job.
Therefore, your user name must be registered in the equipment. If the user name is
not registered, your print job is proceeded as the invalid job according to the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement settings.
When the NTLM Authentication is used for the User Authentication, your computer
must log in the domain.
• If the No Limit Black function is enabled, you do not have to specify the department
code when you print a document with selecting “Mono” in the “Color” option in the
Setup tab of printer driver.
• Some options listed in the printer driver can also be set from an application (for
example, collation). However, using collation in the application may cause prob-
lems. In that case, use the driver option to perform the function, rather than setting it
from the application. But depending on the application, settings such as the orienta-
tion may need to be set in the application, or the printer driver, or both. The applica-
tion may not set up the file properly for printing on this equipment and may also take
longer to process. In order to print properly from the application that you are using,
please see the section about printing in the application’s manual.
• When printing with the PS3 printer driver from Adobe Acrobat, the Fit to Paper
enlargement feature does not work if the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option is
enabled in the PostScript settings of the PS3 printer driver. To use the Fit to Paper
enlargement feature, please disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the
PostScript settings of the PS3 printer driver.
• When printing with the PS3 printer driver from the application that creates the Post-
Script code for printing such as Adobe Acrobat, the following print options may not
work correctly. In that case, please disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option
in the PostScript settings of the PS3 printer driver.
- Manual Scale
- Print Paper Size
- Paper Type
- User Front Cover
- User Back Cover
- Interleave Pages
- Insert Pages
- Booklet
- Multiple Pages per Sheet
- All options in the Effect tab
- All options in the Image Quality tab

How to Print
Once you have installed the printer driver and configured it properly, you can print
directly from most Windows applications. Simply choose the Print command from within
your application.
You can print using the various functions by setting print options on the printer driver.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 201

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Printing from Windows applications

1. Open a file and select [Print] from the [File] menu of the
application.
• The Print dialog box appears.

2. Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and

Click [Properties].

• The printer properties dialog box appears.

SUPPLEMENT: The procedures for displaying the properties dialog for the printer driver may be differ-
ent depending on an application that you are using. See your application’s manual
about displaying the printer properties dialog box.

3. Setting the Print Options for each tab according to how you
want to print.

• Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a docu-
ment.
P.207 "Print Options"
• You can also set the print options using setting profiles.
P.204 "Setting Print Options Using Profiles"

4. Click [OK] to save the settings.

202 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

5. Click [OK] or [Print] to print a document.

Setting Up Print Options

Print Options are the attributes you set to define the way a print job is processed. For
example, the private print and proof print options determine how the copier manages
your print job.

SUPPLEMENT: To find the printing instructions for your specific needs, refer to the procedures in the fol-
lowing section.
P.239 "Printing with Extended Print Functionality"

How to Setup
There are several ways to set print options. Also, how the settings effect printing varies
depending on the way you set the options. Also the tabs displayed vary depending on
how you display the printer properties.

— Setting Initial Values of Print Options

Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Printers folder
within the Windows Start menu will establish the initial values of the options. For exam-
ple, the paper size setting you most commonly use, optional device settings, user infor-
mation settings, etc., are settings you will not want to change every time you print. It is
convenient to set these options as initial values.

NOTE: If you have install the printer driver by Point-and-Print on Windows 2000, Windows XP,
or Windows Server 2003, please set the initial values of print options from the [Printing
Default] button in the [Advanced] tab on the properties dialog box that can be displayed
by selecting [Properties] in the [File] menu. The initial values cannot be set by the fol-
lowing method.

How to display:

1. Click [Start], [Settings], and select [Printers] (for Windows

98/Me/NT 4.0/2000) or [Printers and Faxes] (for Windows XP/
Server 2003).
2. Select the printer driver for the equipment, click the [File]
menu and select [Properties] (for Windows 98/Me), [Docu-
ment Defaults] (for Windows NT 4.0), or [Printing Prefer-
ences] (for Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003).

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 203

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Setting Print Options for Each Print Job

Setting the print options by displaying the printer properties from the Print dialog box
within an application will establish the values for the current print job. The print option
settings specific to each print job are set using this method.

How to display:

1. Click the [File] menu and select [Print] on an application.

2. Select the printer driver of the equipment to be used and
Click [Properties].

— Setting Print Options Using Profiles

Print option settings can be saved so you can easily load specifically configured set-
tings for a particular job.
In order to print a document using profiles, you should create the saved profile first.
P.204 "Saving profile"
Once you save profile, you can load the settings for a particular job to print a document.
P.205 "Loading profile"
You can also delete the profile that you no longer require.
P.206 "Deleting profile"

Saving profile

You can create up to 20 profiles for a printer driver.

1. Configure the print options on each tab.

• Setting the print options varies depending on how you want to print a docu-
ment.
P.207 "Print Options"

2. Click [Save As...] at the Profile group.

• The Profile Name dialog box appears.

204 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3. Enter the profile name and click [OK].

• The file name can be up to 63 characters long.

SUPPLEMENT: If you enter the existing profile name, it prompts whether overwrite the existing profile or
not. If you want to overwrite the existing profile, click [OK].

4. The setting profile is saved.

Loading profile

1. Select a profile in the “Profile” drop down box.

• The settings profile is loaded from the file and apply to the printer options.

NOTE: Selecting “None” in the “Profile” drop down box cannot restore the initial settings on the
printer driver. To restore the initial settings after selecting a profile, click [Restore
Defaults].

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 205

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Deleting profile

1. Select a profile that you want to delete in the “Profile” drop

down box, and click [Delete].

• The Confirm Profile Delete dialog box appears.

2. Click [Yes] to delete the selected profile.

206 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Print Options
This section describes print options in each tab of the printer driver. This section will
help you to find the description of specific print options, or understand the functions for
each print option.

1
2
3

6 7 8 9

1) Printer Name
Displays the name given to the printer driver when it was installed, or the name it
displays on the icon in the Printer folder.
2) Menu Tabs
The menu items of the printer driver are displayed as tabs. Clicking on a tab will dis-
play the contents of the selected tab. The tabs displayed vary depending on the
way the print properties are displayed.
- Setup Tab
The Setup tab contains basic print operation settings, such as original paper
size, print paper size, paper source, paper type, orientation, number of copies,
and so on. Also this tab allows you to enable enlarge/reduce printing, sort print-
ing, stapling and punching, and 2-sided printing.
P.209 "Setup Tab"
- Print Job Tab
The Print Job tab contains job type settings that select the way this equipment
handles the print job. This tab also allows you to enable various job types such
as Scheduled Print, Private Print, and Proof Print. And you can print a docu-
ment as an overlay file, or store to e-Filing.
P.215 "Print Job Tab"
- Layout Tab
The Layout Tab contains finishing options such as Cover page printing, Booklet
printing, and N-up printing.
P.218 "Layout Tab - Standard Window"
P.223 "Layout Tab - Booklet Window"
P.225 "Layout Tab - Multiple Pages per Sheet Window"
- Effect Tab
The Effect Tab contains print options that add the effects to your print jobs such
as Watermarks, Overlay Image printing, Rotate printing, Mirror printing, and
Negative printing. Also it allows to enable Toner Save and Smoothing functions.
P.227 "Effect Tab"

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 207

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Image Quality Tab

The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed. You can
easily select appropriate image quality depending on the type of job being
printed.
P.232 "Image Quality Tab"
- Fonts Tab
The Fonts Tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed. This tab
is only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers
folder.
P.236 "Font Tab"
- Configuration Tab
The Configuration Tab allows you to configure the options. When any optional
unit is installed in this equipment, set the configuration of the machine on this
tab. This tab is only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the
Printers folder.
P.237 "Configuration Tab"
- About Tab
The About Tab contains the version information of the printer driver.
P.239 "About Tab"
3) Preview window
In the Preview windows, you can check the current settings in the printer driver. You
can change view type by clicking [Graphic] to display the print options settings
graphically or [Text] to display the print options settings as a texts.
4) Profile
Print option settings can be saved on your hard disk. You can save print option set-
tings by clicking [Save As...] and easily load a setting file by selecting a profile name
in the drop down box.
P.204 "Setting Print Options Using Profiles"
5) [Restore Defaults]
Click this to restore the settings to the original factory defaults.
6) [OK]
Click this to enter the input settings and complete the print options settings.
7) [Cancel]
Click this to cancel the input settings and exit the print options settings.
8) [Apply]
Click this to enter the input settings without closing the print options settings. This
button is only displayed when the printer properties are accessed from the Printers
folder for Windows NT 4.0, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server
2003. This button remains grayed out until a setting is changed.
9) [Help]
Click this to browse the HELP for the printer driver.

208 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Setup Tab
The Setup tab contains basic print operation settings, such as original paper size, print
paper size, paper source, paper type, orientation, number of copies, and so on. Also
this tab allows you to enable enlarge/reduce printing, sort printing, stapling and punch-
ing, and 2-sided printing.

1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

1) Original Paper Size

This selects the size of a document to be printed.
Available original paper sizes are listed below:

• Letter • A4
• Ledger • A5
• Legal • A3
• Statement • B4
• Computer • B5
• 13”LG • A3-Wide
• 8.5”SQ • Folio
• (12 x 18”) • A6
• 8K
• 16K

SUPPLEMENTS: • The default paper size will be “Letter” or “A4” according to the regional setting in the
Windows.
• “A3-Wide” is displayed only for the european version, and “(12 x 18”)” is displayed
only for the US version.
• “(12 x 18”)” and “A3-Wide” are not available when the Hanging Finisher is installed.

2) Manual Scale
Check this box to manually enter the zoom ratio, to enlarge or reduce an image. You
can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom ratio. This is not available when
you enable the Booklet printing.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 209

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3) Print Paper Size

Select this to enlarge or reduce a page image to fit exactly in the selected paper
size. If you do not enable enlarge or reduce printing, select “Same as Original
Paper Size”.
Also when you want to enable Tab printing, select “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab” here.
When you select “Letter Tab” or “A4 Tab”, the Primary Tab dialog box appears.

— Primary Tab Dialog

Tab Manufacturer
Select the product name of the tab paper that you use. This equipment supports fol-
lowing tab paper.
For Letter Tab: Blanks USA copy Tabs (5 Banks) LT + 1/2” Tab
Blanks USA copy Tabs (8 Banks) LT + 1/2” Tab

For A4 Tab: KOKUYO A4-S (5 Banks)

King JIM A4-S (5Banks)
If you use other tab papers than above, select “Custom”. When you select “Cus-
tom”, you must specify the tab extension manually.
Tab Extension
Enter the width of the tab extension. This must be set only when “Custom” is
selected in the “Tab Manufacturer” option.
Image Shift Width
Enter the width to shift the printed image.
For example, if you want to print a text on the tab extension of Letter Tab paper, cre-
ate a Letter sized document and input the text on the right side. You must place the
text in the height exactly to fit to the tab extension. Also the right margin, a margin
between the text and right edge of the document, must have more than 0.08 inch or
2 mm space because the equipment cannot print in the space. Then enter the width
of the tab extension as Image Shift Width.
Width of Tab Extension = Image Shift Margin
More than 0.08" or 2mm
Document Printed Image
Tab Text

Tab Text

Must exactly
fit the tab extension

Unit
Select the unit for the Tab Extension and Image Shift option. The default unit varies
depending on the regional setting of the client computer.

210 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTES: • The tab paper cannot be fed from LCF (not available for some countries or regions)
and drawers.
• When you place the tab paper on the Bypass Tray, make sure the tab side of the
paper becomes outside.

Place the tab paper

so that the tab side
becomes outside.

• If the document for tab printing is not created properly or the Image Shift Width is
not set properly, the image will not be printed in the correct position within the tab
extension. Please make sure to create the document and set the Image Shift Width
correctly.
• If mis-printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously, dirt may
adhere to the reverse side of a paper. To avoid this, it is recommended to print a tab
paper as a separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning
before printing next tab paper.
• When printing tab paper, the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray
because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit. In that case, remove
the tab paper before printing a next job.

4) Paper Source
This selects the paper source. Please select a paper source that correlates with the
printing size.
- Automatic — Automatically selects the paper set in this equipment according to
the printed document size.
- Drawer 1 — Paper is fed from the 1st Drawer.
- Drawer 2 — Paper is fed from the 2nd Drawer.
- Drawer 3 — Paper is fed from the 3rd Drawer. This cannot be selected if the
Drawer 3 and 4 are not installed.
- Drawer 4 — Paper is fed from the 4th Drawer. This cannot be selected if the
Drawer 3 and 4 are not installed.
- Large Capacity Feeder — Paper is fed from the Large Capacity Feeder. This
cannot be selected if the Large Capacity Feeder is not installed.
- Sheet Feed Bypass — Paper is fed from the Bypass Tray.

NOTES: • LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

• The selectable values vary depending on the optional devices installed on this
equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

5) Paper Type
This sets the media type of the paper.
- Plain — Select this when printing on 20 lbs plain paper (64-80 g/m2 plain
paper).
- Thick1 — Select this when printing on 24-28 lbs thick paper (81-105 g/m2 thick
paper).
- Thick2 — Select this when printing on 32-90 lbs thick paper (106-163 g/m2 thick
paper).
- Thick3 — Select this when printing on 110 lbs thick paper (164-209 g/m2 thick
paper).
- Transparency — Select this when printing on transparent sheets.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 211

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

6) Orientation
This sets the paper printing direction.
- Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.
- Landscape — The document is printed in the landscape direction.
7) Number of Copies
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 999.
8) Copy Handling
This sets how to sort the printed sheet when numerous copies are made for printing.
- Sort Copies — Select this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...).

- Group Copies — Select this for group-printing (1, 1, 1... 2, 2, 2... 3, 3, 3...).

- Rotated Sort Copies — Select this for rotate sort-printing.

NOTES: • “Group Copies” and “Rotated Sort Copies” can be selected only when more than 2
copies are entered at the Number of Copies option.
• “Rotated Sort Copies” can be selected only when “Letter”, “A4”, or “B5” is selected
at the Output Paper Size option.
• When “Rotate Sort Copies” is selected, the Resolution option in the Image Quality
tab will be “600 x 600 dpi” and the selection will be disabled.

9) Color
This sets whether a print job is printed in color mode or monochrome mode.
- Automatic — Select this to determine the color mode automatically. When a
print job is a black and white document, the system automatically prints the doc-
ument in monochrome mode. When a print job is a color document, it prints the
document in color mode.
- Mono — Select this to print a document in monochrome mode.

NOTE: Only “Mono” can be selected for PCL6 printer driver because the PCL6 printer driver
only supports black and white printing.

10) Staple
This sets whether a print job is printed with staples.
- None — Select this to print without staples.

212 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Upper Left — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper left.

- Center Top — Select this to staple the printed document double in the upper
side.

- Upper Right — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper right.

- Middle Left — Select this to staple the printed document double in the left.

- Center Double — Select this to fold and staple the printed document double in
the center. When you select this, the pages will be printed on the sheets accord-
ing to the print option settings, and then simply fold and staple double in the cen-
ter of the sheets.

SUPPLEMENT: “Center Double” can be used to create a booklet from a document that has been
already created as a paginated booklet. To create a paginated booklet from a normal
document, perform the booklet printing.
P.223 "Layout Tab - Booklet Window"

NOTES: • The selectable options vary depending on the paper size.

• “None” can only be selected if a finisher is not installed.
• “Center Double” can only be selected when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed
and configured on the Configuration tab.
• “None” can only be selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab.

11) Hole Punch

This sets whether a print job is printed with hole punches.
- None — Select this to print without hole punches.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 213

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Center Top — Select this to create holes on the upper side and print.

- Middle Left — Select this to create holes on the left side and print.

NOTES: • “None” can only be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.
• “None” can only be selected when the Booklet printing is set at the Layout tab.

12) 2-Sided Printing

This sets 2-Sided printing (printing on both sides of paper) according to the type of
binding for 2-sided-printed pages.
This option is only for printing on both sides of the paper. If you want to bind the out-
put with staples, you should set the finishing option as well.
- None — Select this if you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.
- Book — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in the same direction and
to bind the document along the vertical side of the paper so that the pages can
be turned over right and left.
Portrait Landscape
1
2

1
2

- Tablet — Select this to print on both sides of the paper with a vertical reversal
and to bind the document along the horizontal side of the paper so that the
pages can be turned over up and down.
Portrait Landscape
1
1
2
2

NOTES: • “Book” or “Tablet” will be automatically selected when the Booklet printing is set at
the Layout tab.
• “None” can only be selected when Tab printing is enabled.

214 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Print Job Tab

The Print Job tab contains job type settings that select the way this equipment handles
a print job. This tab allows you to enable various job types such as Scheduled Print,
Private Print, and Proof Print. You can also print a document as an overlay file, or store
to e-filing.

1
2
3

4
5

7
8

1) Normal Print
Select this to print a job normally.
2) Scheduled Print
Select this to print a job at a future date and time.
When this is selected, click [Edit] to set the date and time to print a job.
3) Private Print
Select this to print a private job. When you select this, enter a up to 63-digit pass-
word (between 1 to 63 digits) in the Password field.
The print job, sent as a private job, is saved in the private job queue on this equip-
ment, and is not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display.
This option is useful when you want to print a confidential document that is secured
by a password. The user has to enter the password to print the private job when
activating printing from the Touch Panel Display.
4) Proof Print
Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for approval before
printing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job, is saved in the
proof job queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not printed until
you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option allows you to check
a job’s output before printing the remaining copies and thereby reduce paper waste.

NOTE: When printing from an application that sends separately for each number of copies, this
equipment will print all numbers of copies even if you set the Proof Print. In that case,
set one copy for the number of copies for a proof print job in the printer driver, and then
change the number of copies from the Control Panel to print required copies of the print
job.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 215

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

5) Print to Overlay File

When this is selected, the print job is saved as an overlay file that is imposed on
other documents. For example, if you want to print a master page image on the
background of a document, you can create overlay file of master merge image using
this option. Then you can print a document using this overlay by specifying this file
as an overlay image in the “Overlay Image” option at the Effect tab.

NOTES: • If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the docu-
ment will be saved as an overlay file.
• Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay
image must be created at the same size, orientation, and resolution.

6) Store to e-Filing
Select this to save a job to a Box. When this is selected, select the box from the
drop down menu on the right. If the printer driver connects to this equipment via
SMB, it detects the available Box numbers and Box name in the drop down box. If
not, all Box numbers are listed in the drop down box.
If you select a user box, you may be required to enter the password for the selected
box. The job saved to a Box can be printed from the Touch Panel Display at a later
time. It can also be composed with other documents using the e-Filing web utility.
You can also print a job and save it to a box by checking on the “Print” option.

NOTE: When you store a document in e-Filing using the printer driver, the printing image (not
the original document in your computer) will be stored in e-Filing.

SUPPLEMENT: For more information about e-Filing operations, see e-Filing Guide.

7) Destination
This selects the destination tray to which jobs will be output.
- Inner Tray — Select this to route the output to the inner tray.
- Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.
- Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.

NOTE: “Tray 1” and “Tray 2” can be selected when the Hanging Finisher, Multi-staple Finisher
or Saddle-stitch Finisher are installed and configured on the Configuration tab.

8) Department
Enter the user’s department code if the system is managed with department codes.
Please ask your administrator for your department code.

NOTES: • When the User Authentication is enabled on the equipment, the User Authentication
is used to manage the print jobs instead of the department code. In that case, the
user name that is entered to login to your computer is used for the authentication of
the print job. Therefore, you do not need to enter the department code in the printer
driver but your user name must be registered in the equipment. If the user name is
not registered, your print job is proceeded as the invalid job according to the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement settings.
• If the No Limit Black function is enabled, you do not have to specify the department
code when you print a document with selecting “Mono” in the “Color” option in the
Setup tab of printer driver.
• If the number of the printed sheets for a print job exceeds the output limitation for
the entered department code, the print job is stored in the invalid department code
print job list without printing. When you want to print the print job, perform printing
from the [JOB STATUS] button in the Control Panel by entering another department
code of which the output limitation is more than the number of printed sheets.

216 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

SUPPLEMENT: How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the
Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator
mode and whether the SNMP Communication is enabled or not. When the SNMP
Communication is enabled and Department Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, an error
message will be displayed when entering the invalid department code. When the
SNMP Communication is disabled and Department Code Enforcement is set to “ON”,
the invalid department code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print
job list without printing. When the Department Code Enforcement is “Print”, the invalid
department code print job will be printed. When the Department Code Enforcement is
“Delete”, the invalid department code print job will be deleted without printing.
However, when using Windows NT 4.0 and configure the connection through a Net-
Ware print server, an error message for entering the invalid department code will not be
displayed even if the Department Code Enforcement setting and SNMP Communica-
tion is enabled.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 217

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Layout Tab - Standard Window

The standard window of the Layout tab allows you to enable Front Cover printing, Back
Cover printing, Inserting Pages, and Interleaving Pages for a normal layout print job.

SUPPLEMENTS: • Front Cover printing is also available with Booklet printing. If can be set in the Book-
let window.
• Front Cover printing, Back Cover printing, and Interleaving Pages are also available
with N-up printing. They can be set in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window.

NOTE: “Use Front Cover”, “Use Back Cover”, Insert Pages”, and “Interleave Pages” cannot be
set when Tab printing is enabled.

1) Use Front Cover

This sets front cover printing which allows you to insert or print a cover on a sheet
fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup tab.
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a
cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.
Source
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic” is
selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Print Style
This selects how you want to print a cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page image on the front
side of a cover.
- Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two page images on
both sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is
enabled on the Setup tab.

NOTE: If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the first page
is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and the back side of the cover will be
blank.

218 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) Use Back Cover

This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a
sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup
tab.
To enable back cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where
a back cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.
Source
Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic” is
selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Print Style
This selects how you want to print a back cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the last page image on the front
side of a cover.
- Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the last two page images on
both sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is
enabled on the Setup tab.

NOTES: • If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the last
page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be
blank.
• If “Print on both sides of page” is selected but there is only one page printed on the
back cover, the last page is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back
side of the cover will be blank.

3) Insert Page
This sets sheet insertion printing which allows you to insert a sheet between pages,
or print a specific page on a sheet fed from a tray other than the Paper Source
option selected on the Setup tab.
This option is useful when you want to insert a blank sheet between chapters, or
when you want to print chapter cover pages on the different paper.
To enable sheet insertion printing, check on the box and select the location from
where inserted sheets are to be fed and the print style to be used. Then, enter the
page number you want to insert in the Pages field.

NOTE: A sheet cannot be inserted before the first page when 2-Sided printing is enabled.

Source
Select the location from where insertion sheets are to be fed. When “Automatic” is
selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Print Style
This selects how you want to print on insertion sheets.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert blank sheets.
- Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the specified pages on the front
side of the insertion sheets.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 219

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the specified pages on both
sides of the insertion sheets. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing
option is enabled on the Setup tab.
Pages
Enter the page number where the sheet is to be inserted. To enter multiple pages,
separate page numbers with commas.
When “Do not print on page” is selected from the Print Style drop down box, the
blank sheet is inserted before the entered pages.
When “Print on 1 side of page” is selected from the Print Style drop down box,
entered page will be printed on the inserted sheet.
When “Print on both sides of page” is selected from the Print Style drop down box,
entered page and the next page will be printed on both sides of the inserted sheet.

220 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTES: • If “Do not print on page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you
enter an even numbered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the Pages
field, the specified page will be blank. The desired blank sheet is inserted next and
the 2-sided printing continues from the next page.
5
4

Blank Sheet

Blank
3
2
1

• If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, the spec-
ified page is printed on the front side of the sheet and back side of the sheet will be
blank.
5
4
Blank
3
2
1

• If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and you
enter an even numbered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the Pages
field, the specified page will be blank. The page is printed on the front side of the
inserted sheet and the 2-sided printing continues from the next page.
6
5
Blank
4
Blank
3
2
1

• If “Print on both sides of page” is selected while 2-sided printing is performed, and
you enter an even numbered page (printed on the back side of the paper) for the
Pages field, the specified page will be blank. The specified page and the next page
are printed on the inserted sheet and the 2-sided printing continues from the next
page.
7
6
5
4
Blank
3
2
1

4) Interleave Pages
This sets the interleaving page feature that is useful when you want to insert paper
of a different type (or from another source) between every page of your print job. For
example, you could use this option to insert blank, colored sheets between over-
head transparencies.
To enable interleaving pages, check on the box and select the location from where
sheets are to be fed.

NOTE: When this option is enabled as well as the “Use Front Cover” and “Use Back Cover”
options enabled, no page is inserted after the front cover and back cover.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 221

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Source
Select the location from where the interleaving sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic”
is selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Duplicate
When you check on this, you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet.

222 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Layout Tab - Booklet Window

In the Booklet window, you can print a properly paginated booklet or magazine-style
publication. You can even create bound booklets that are folded and stapled in the cen-
ter.

NOTE: Booklet printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled.

2
3
4

5
6

1) Output Document Layout

Select the booklet size to be made.
- A5 on A4 — Select this to print a A5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
A4 paper to fit on half a sheet (A5).
- A4 on A3 — Select this to print a A4 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
A3 paper to fit on half a sheet (A4).
- B5 on B4 — Select this to print a B5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
B4 paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).
- Letter-Half on Letter — Select this to print a 1/2 Letter size booklet. Every 2
pages are printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet.
- LT on LD — Select this to print a Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on Ledger paper to fit on half a sheet (Letter).
- A6 on A5 — Select this to print a A6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
A5 paper to fit on half a sheet (A6).
- B6 on B5 — Select this to print a B6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
B5 paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).
- 1/2 LG on LG — Select this to print a 1/2 Legal size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 Comp on Comp — Select this to print a 1/2 Computer size booklet. Every 2
pages are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 Folio on Folio — Select this to print a 1/2 Folio size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 Statement on Statement — Select this to print a 1/2 Statement size booklet.
Every 2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 13’LG on 13’LG — Select this to print a 1/2 13inchLG size booklet. Every 2
pages are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 1/2 8.5’SQ on 8.5’SQ — Select this to print a 1/2 8.5inchSQ size booklet. Every
2 pages are printed on 8.5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet.
- 32K on 16K — Select this to print a 32K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on 16K paper to fit on half a sheet.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 223

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- 16K on 8K — Select this to print a 16K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on 8K paper to fit on half a sheet.
2) Center Margin
This sets the gutter on the center of two sided page. You can enter up to 0.500 inch
(12.700 mm).
3) Outer Margin
This sets the gutter on the right side and left side on the paper. You can enter up to
1.00 inch (25.40 mm).
4) Units
Select the unit for the Center Margin and Outer Margin option. The default unit var-
ies depending on the regional setting in the Windows.
5) Staple Down the Center
Check this to staple double in the center.

NOTE: “Staple Down the Center” is available only when “A5 on A4”, “A4 on A3”, “B5 on B4”,
“Letter - Half on Letter”, “LT on LD”, “1/2 LG on LG”, or “16K on 8K” is selected at the
Output Document Layout drop down box and the Saddle-stitch finisher is installed.

6) Number Pages from Right to Left

Check this to print a booklet that can be read from right to left.
7) Use Front Cover
This sets front cover printing for a booklet which allows you to insert or print a cover
on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the
Setup tab.
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a
cover sheet is to be fed and the print style.
Source
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic” is
selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Print Style
This selects how you want to print a cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages and last
two pages on both sides of a cover.

NOTE: If “Print on both sides of page” is selected but there is only one page for the last page
printed on the cover, the last page is printed inside of the back cover page and the back
cover page will be blank.

224 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Layout Tab - Multiple Pages per Sheet Window

In the Multiple Pages per Sheet window, you can enable N-up printing.

NOTE: N-up printing cannot be set when Tab printing is enabled.

1
2

1) Number of pages per sheet

This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit
the selected paper size automatically and printed.
- 2 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged left
to right (when the orientation is portrait) or from top to bottom (when the orienta-
tion is landscape) on one sheet.
- 2 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged
right to left (when the orientation is portrait) or from bottom to top (when the ori-
entation is landscape) on one sheet.
- 4 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged hor-
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
- 4 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged hor-
izontally from the right and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
- 4 pages: Left to Right by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages
arranged vertically from the top and printed left to right on one sheet.
- 4 pages: Right to Left by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages
arranged vertically from the top and printed right to left on one sheet.
- 6 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged hor-
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
- 8 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 8 pages arranged hor-
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
- 9 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged hor-
izontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
- 16 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
2) Draw Border Around Pages
Check this to print borders each page.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 225

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3) Use Front Cover

This sets front cover printing for N-up printing which allows you to insert or print a
cover on a sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on
the Setup tab.
To enable cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where a
cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.
Source
Select the location from where a cover sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic” is
selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Print Style
This selects how you want to print a cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page image on the front
side of a cover.
- Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two page images on
both sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is
enabled on the Setup tab.

NOTE: If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the first page
is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be blank.

4) Use Back Cover

This sets back cover printing which allows you to insert or print a back cover on a
sheet fed from a different tray than the Paper Source option selected on the Setup
tab.
To enable back cover printing, check on the box and select the location from where
a back cover sheet is to be fed and the print style to be used.
Source
Select the location from where a back cover sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic” is
selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Print Style
This selects how you want to print a back cover.
- Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank cover.
- Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the last page image on the front
side of a cover.
- Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the last two page images on
both sides of a cover. This is available only when the 2-Sided Printing option is
enabled on the Setup tab.

NOTE: If “Print on 1 side of page” is selected while 2-Sided Printing is performed, the last page
is printed on the front side of the cover sheet and back side of the cover will be blank.

226 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

5) Interleave Pages
This sets the interleaving page feature when you want to insert paper of a different
type (or from another source) between every page of your print job. For example,
you could use this option to insert blank, colored sheets between overhead trans-
parencies.
To enable interleaving pages, check on the box and select the location from where
sheets are to be fed.
Source
Select the location from where a interleaving sheet is to be fed. When “Automatic”
is selected, the paper is automatically selected according to the printed document
size.

NOTE: The selectable values in the Source drop down box vary depending on the optional
devices installed on this equipment and their configuration on the Configuration tab.

Duplicate
When you check on this, you can print previous page images on the inserted sheet.

— Effect Tab
The Effect Tab contains print options that add effects to your print jobs such as Water-
marks, Overlay Image printing, Rotate printing, Mirror printing, and Negative printing.
Also it lets you enable Toner Save and Smoothing functions.

Effect Tab for PCL6 and PCL5c

3
6
7

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 227

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Effect Tab for PS3

3
4
5
6
7
8

1) Watermark
This selects the watermark to be used or edited. The following values except “None”
are the default watermarks that have been registered in the printer driver. New
watermarks you create are added to the drop down box list.
- None — Select this if no watermark is desired.
The following default watermarks are also displayed in the drop down box:
- TOP SECRET
- CONFIDENTIAL
- DRAFT
- ORIGINAL
- COPY
[Add]
Click this to create new watermark. The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking
on this.
P.230 "Add/Edit Watermark"
[Edit]
Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down box and click it to edit the water-
mark. The Watermark dialog box appears by clicking on this.
P.230 "Add/Edit Watermark"
[Delete]
Select a watermark from the Watermark drop down box and click it to edit a water-
mark.

NOTES: • The default watermarks can be deleted but, If deleted, they cannot be restored.
• “None” cannot be deleted.

Print on first page only

Check this to print a watermark on the first page only. This setting will become avail-
able when any watermark is selected from the Watermark drop down box.
2) Overlay Image
This selects an overlay image to be used. This feature allows you to print an image
on the background of a print job, although the watermark allows only a text.

228 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTES: • Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay
image must be created at the same size, orientation, and resolution.
• When printing with Overlay Image using the PS3 printer driver from an application
that can create the PS command directly, the overlay image will not be printed. In
that case, disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript Set-
tings dialog box.
P.231 "PostScript Settings"

SUPPLEMENT: If you want to use an overlay image in your job, you must first create an overlay file. To
create an overlay image, create an overlay image with most applications and print it as
an overlay file. You can enable creating an overlay file on the Print Job Tab.
P.215 "Print Job Tab"

[Delete]
Click this to delete the overlay image that you select in the drop down box.
Print over the document
Check this to print overlay image over the document.
3) Rotate 180 degrees
Check on this to perform rotation printing of an image.
4) Mirror
Check on this to perform mirror printing of an image. This print option is available
only for the PS3 printer driver.

NOTES: • The mirror printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the
application’s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings.
• When printing from Adobe Acrobat or such applications, the mirror printing does not
work if the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option is enabled in the PostScript set-
tings. To use the mirror printing, please disable the “Use PostScript Passthrough”
option in the PostScript settings.

5) Negative/Positive
Check on this to perform negative printing of an image. This print option is available
only for the PS3 printer driver.

NOTES: • The Negative/Positive option is available only when “Mono” is selected at the
“Color” drop down box on the Setup tab.
• The negative printing may not be applied when the application gives priority to the
application’s PostScript settings over the printer driver settings.
• When printing from Adobe Acrobat or such applications, the Negative/Positive print-
ing does not work if the “Use PostScript Passthrough” option is enabled in the Post-
Script settings. To use the Negative/Positive printing, please disable the “Use
PostScript Passthrough” option in the PostScript settings.

6) Toner Save
Check this to print in toner save mode.
7) Do not Print Blank Pages
Check this ignore blank pages for printing.
8) [PostScript Settings]
Click this to specify the PostScript specific functions. The PostScript Settings dialog
box appears by clicking on this. This print option is available only for the PS3 printer
driver.
P.231 "PostScript Settings"

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 229

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Add/Edit Watermark
When you click [Add] or [Edit], the Watermark dialog box appears and you can create
new watermark or edit selected watermarks.

5
6
7
8
9

10
1
2
11
3 12
13
4

1) X Position
The horizontal position of a watermark is displayed. You can change the position
using the vertical scroll bar.
2) Y Position
The vertical position of a watermark is displayed. You can change the position
using the horizontal scroll bar.
3) Units
Select the unit for the “X Position” and “Y Position” field.
4) [Center Watermark]
Click this to automatically move the watermark position to the center.
5) Caption
Enter the text of a watermark. You can enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters.
When you are editing a watermark, the selected watermark text is displayed in the
field.
6) Font Name
Select a font to be used for the watermark text.

NOTE: Do not select the symbol font such as “Symbol”, “Webdings”, and so on. The symbol
font will not apply to the watermark text.

7) Style
Select the font style for the watermark text.
- Regular — Select this to set the regular style to the text.
- Bold — Select this to set the bold style to the text.
- Italic — Select this to set the italic style to the text.
- Bold Italic — Select this to set the bold and italic style to the text.
8) Color
Select a color of watermark text. If the color that you require is not listed in the drop
down box, click [Browse] to add new color.

NOTES: • When “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down box on the Setup Tab, this option
will be disabled.
• This option is disabled for the PCL6 printer driver because it supports only black and
white printing.

230 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

9) Font Size
Enter the font size for the watermark text. The font size can be set from 6 to 300 pt
in units of 1 pt. You can also set the font size using the scroll bar.
10) Angle
Enter the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text. The angle can be set from
-90 to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree. You can also set the degree of angle by mov-
ing the scroll bar.
11) Solid
Select this to print solid type of watermark.
12) Draw as Outline
Select this to print outline type of watermark.
13) Transparency
Select this to transparent watermark. When you select this, set the brightness from
0 (darker) to 100% (lighter) in units of 1%. You can also set the brightness using the
scroll bar.

PostScript Settings

1
2
3
4

1) Output Format
This selects the output format for printing.
- ASCII — The job is sent in the ASCII data format.
- Encapsulated PostScript (EPS) — The job is sent in the EPS format.
- Tagged BCP — Select this to send a job in Tagged Binary format over parallel
ports.
- Using Adobe DSC — Select this to send a job with the DSC comments.

NOTE: The EPS format is usually used for creating an image to import into another document.
Therefore, only the first page of the document will be printed when “Encapsulated Post-
Script (EPS)” is selected.

2) Print Error Information

Check on this to print a PS error information page when any errors occur for print-
ing.
3) Compress Bitmap
Check on this to send compress bitmaps to this equipment.
4) Use PostScript Passthrough
Check this for PostScript data created by the application to be passed through to
this equipment.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 231

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTE: If this option is enabled, the following print options may not work correctly when printing
from the application that creates the PostScript code for printing such as Adobe Acro-
bat. In that case, please disable this option for printing.
- Manual Scale
- Print Paper Size
- Paper Type
- User Front Cover
- User Back Cover
- Interleave Pages
- Insert Pages
- Booklet
- Multiple Pages per Sheet
- All options in the Effect tab
- All options in the Image Quality tab

— Image Quality Tab

The Image Quality Tab allows you to select how images are printed. You can easily
select appropriate image quality depending on the type of a document.
Setting items in the Image Quality Tab vary with the type of printer drivers.

For PCL6 Printer Driver

3
4
5

1) Halftone
This sets how halftone are printed.
- Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.
2) Resolution
This cannot be changed in the PCL6 printer driver.
3) Smoothing
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.
4) Distinguish Thin Lines
Check this to print thin lines clearly.
5) Use Black for All Text
Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.

232 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

For PCL5c Printer Driver

4
5

6
7
8
9

1) Image Quality Type

This sets how colors are printed by selecting the job type. The printer driver auto-
matically applies proper color quality for selected job type.
- General — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing a general color
document.
- Photograph — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing photos.
- Presentation — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a vivid doc-
ument.
- Line Art — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a document
contains a lot of characters or line arts.

NOTE: The Image Quality type option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color”
drop down box on the Setup tab.

2) Halftone
This sets how halftone are printed.
- Auto — Select this to print using proper halftone depending on the contents in
the document automatically. When this is selected, the halftone is printed in
detail for the texts, and smoothly for the graphics.
- Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.
- Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.

NOTES: • “Auto” is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down box on the
Setup tab.
• The default value will be “Detail” when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down
box on the Setup tab.

3) Resolution
This sets the resolution for printing.
- 600 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 600 x 600 dpi.
- 1200 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 1200 x 600 dpi.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 233

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTES: • “1200 x 600 dpi” is available only when the optional expansion memory is installed
and configured on the Configuration tab.
• “1200 x 600 dpi” cannot be selected when “Save to e-Filing” is selected on the Print
Job tab.
• The Resolution option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box on the Setup tab.

4) Brightness
Enter the percentage of brightness for printing. You can set from -100 (darkest) to
100 (lightest) in units of 1%. You can also set the percentage of brightness by mov-
ing the scroll bar.
5) Saturation
Enter the percentage of saturation for printing. You can set from -100 (low clear) to
100 (high clear) in units of 1%. You can also set the percentage of saturation by
moving the scroll bar.

NOTE: The Saturation option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down
box on the Setup tab.

6) Smoothing
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.

NOTE: The Smoothing option is only available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box on the Setup tab.

7) Distinguish Thin Lines

Check this to print thin lines clearly.
8) Pure Gray
Check this to print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color —
cyan, magenta, and yellow— is the same percentage (C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).

NOTE: The Pure Gray option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down
box in the Setup tab.

9) Use Black for All Text

Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.

For PS3 Printer Driver

4
5
6
7
8
9

234 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

1) Image Quality Type

This sets how colors are printed by selecting the job type. The printer driver auto-
matically applies proper color quality for selected job type.
- General — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing a general color
document.
- Photograph — Select this to apply proper color quality for printing photos.
- Presentation — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a vivid doc-
ument.
- Line Art — Select this to apply proper image quality for printing a document
contains a lot of characters or line arts.

NOTE: The Image Quality type option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color”
drop down box on the Setup tab.

2) Halftone
This sets how halftone are printed.
- Auto — Select this to print using proper halftone depending on the contents in
the document automatically. When this is selected, the halftone is printed in
detail for the texts, and smoothly for the graphics.
- Detail — Select this to print halftone in detail.
- Smooth — Select this to print halftone smoothly.
3) Resolution
This sets the resolution for printing.
- 600 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 600 x 600 dpi.
- 1200 x 600 dpi — Select this to print in 1200 x 600 dpi.

NOTES: • “1200 x 600 dpi” is available only when the optional expansion memory is installed
and configured on the Configuration tab.
• “1200 x 600 dpi” cannot be selected when “Save to e-Filing” is selected on the Print
Job tab.
• The Resolution option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box on the Setup tab.

4) Smoothing
Check this to print the texts and graphics smoothly.

NOTE: The Smoothing option is only available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box on the Setup tab.

5) Distinguish Thin Lines

Check this to print thin lines clearly.
6) Black Over Print
Check this to print background contents and then overlay black content on it. If this
is not checked, the background of the black content is not printed. It may remain a
white because the black content may shift and be printed. When you print a docu-
ment that has any content on the background with black texts overlayed, check this
option.

NOTE: The Black Over Print option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box on the Setup tab.

7) Pure Black
Check this to print the contents in black where the percentage of all color —cyan,
magenta, and yellow— is 100% (C=M=Y=100% -> K=100%).

NOTE: The Pure Black option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box in the Setup tab.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 235

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

8) Pure Gray
Check this to print the contents in gray scale where the percentage of each color —
cyan, magenta, and yellow— is the same percentage (C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).

NOTES: • The Pure Gray option is not available when “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop
down box in the Setup tab.
• The Pure Gray option is not available when the Pure Black option is not enabled.

9) Use Black for All Text

Check this to print all texts in 100% black except white texts.

— Font Tab
The Fonts tab allows you to select how the TrueType fonts are printed. The following
figure is the Font Tab for the PS3 printer driver.

NOTE: The Fonts tab can be displayed only from the Printers folder (and not displayed when
displaying the properties from the application’s Print dialog box).

1) TrueType Options
This sets how to print TrueType fonts.
- Always Use TrueType Fonts — Select this to print the document the same as
the print image shown on the screen. All TrueType fonts are extracted on the
system for printing.
- Always Use Printer Fonts — Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts with
the internal fonts for printing. The print result may differ from the print image on
the screen.
- Use Font Substitution Table — Select this to substitute the TrueType fonts
using the internal fonts according to the settings of the font substitution table.
You can edit the font substitution table that is displayed at the Substitution Table
Edit table.
- Download as Bitmap — Select this to print the document as same as the
image shown on the screen.

SUPPLEMENTS: • The default value will be “Always Use TrueType Fonts” for the PCL6 or PCL5c
printer driver.
• The default value will be “Use Font Substitution Table” for the PS3 printer driver.

236 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) Substitution Table Edit

This table shows how each TrueType font is substituted. You can edit the substitu-
tion setting for each TrueType font. In this table, the TrueType font names are dis-
played in the TrueType Font column, and how the TrueType font is printed is shown
in the Use Printer Font column.
To edit the substitution table, select the TrueType font that you want to edit from the
table, and select how the TrueType font is printed at the Printer Font For drop down
box.
At the Printer Font For drop down box, you can select “Download as Soft Font” to
send the TrueType fonts in Type 42 format, or other available printer fonts to be sub-
stituted. The printer fonts displayed in the drop down box differ depending on the
TrueType fonts.
3) [Run Font Manager]
Click this to run the Agfa Font Manager. This is not available if the Agfa Font Man-
ager is not installed.

NOTE: The [Run Font Manager] button is not displayed for the PCL6 or PCL5c printer driver.

— Configuration Tab
The Configuration Tab allows you to configure options. When any optional unit is
installed in this equipment, set the configuration of the machine on this tab.

1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9

10

11
12
13

1) Pedestal
This sets whether or not the optional pedestals or large capacity feeder is installed.
- None — Select this when neither drawer nor large capacity is installed.
- Large Capacity Feeder — Select this when the Large Capacity Feeder is
installed.
- Drawer3 — Select this when 3rd drawer is installed.
- Drawer3 & Drawer4 — Select this when 3rd drawer and 4th drawer are
installed.

NOTE: LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

2) Finisher
This sets whether or not the optional finisher is installed.
- None — Select this when finisher is not installed.
- Hanging Finisher — Select this when the Hanging Finisher is installed.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 237

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Finisher — Select this when the Multi-staple Finisher is installed.

- Saddle Stitch Finisher — Select this when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is
installed.
3) Hole Punch Unit
This sets whether or not the optional hole punch unit is installed.
- None — Select this when hole punch unit is not installed.
- 2 Holes — Select this when the 2 hole punch unit is installed.
- 2/3 Holes — Select this when the 2/3 hole punch unit is installed.
- 4 Holes (F) — Select this when the 4 hole (F) punch unit is installed.
- 4 Holes (S) — Select this when the 4 hole (S) punch unit is installed.
4) Drawer 1/Paper Type
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the 1st drawer.
5) Drawer 2/Paper Type
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the 2nd drawer.
6) Drawer 3/Paper Type
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the 3rd drawer. This can be set only
when the 3rd drawer is installed.
7) Drawer 4/Paper Type
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the 4th drawer. This can be set only
when the 4th drawer is installed.
8) Large Capacity/Paper Type
This sets the paper size and paper type set in the Large Capacity Feeder. This can
be set only when the Large Capacity Feeder is installed.

NOTE: LCF is not available for some countries or regions.

9) Bypass Feeder/Paper Type

This sets the paper type set in the Stack Feed Bypass.
10) Memory
Select the size of memory installed.
11) Enable SNMP Communication
Check this to enable obtaining the configuration information from this equipment.
12) [Update Now]
Click this to obtain the configuration information from this equipment immediately.
This is available only when “Enable SNMP Communication” is checked.

NOTE: If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message “The
address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be displayed
when you click [Update Now]. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the equipment
using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box. After searching the equip-
ment, the SNMP communication will be enabled. For the instructions on how to search
the equipment, refer to the instructions of TopAccessDocMon.
P.323 "Searching for a Printer"

13) Update Automatically

Check this to update the configuration information every time the printer driver is
opened. This is available only when “Enable SNMP Communication” is checked.

238 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTE: If the connection to the equipment has not been configured correctly, the message “The
address of your printer could not be located. Would you like to find it?” will be displayed
when the Configuration tab is displayed. If it is displayed, click [Yes] and search for the
equipment using the TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box. After searching
the equipment, the SNMP communication will be enabled. For the instructions on how
to search the equipment, refer to the instructions of TopAccessDocMon.
P.323 "Searching for a Printer"

— About Tab
The About Tab contains information about the printer driver’s version.

Printing with Extended Print Functionality

In this section, procedures are given to print various types of print job, using the layout
and finishing options. This section can help you to find a print method that you desired.

Printing Various Print Job Types

The printer drivers provide various ways to handle such jobs as Scheduled Print, Pri-
vate Print, Proof Print, Overlay Image file, and Store to e-Filing.

— Printing Scheduled Print Jobs

The Print Scheduling feature allows you to specify the date and time to print your job.
This can be especially useful for delaying printing until off-peak hours.

Printing on a specified data and time

1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Scheduled Print”.

2. Click [Edit...].
• The Scheduled Time dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 239

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3. Click the arrow button at the “Date” drop down box to dis-
play the Calendar window, and select the date that you want
to print.

4. Select the time field and click the spin button to change the
time.

• To change the hour, select the hour number and click the spin button.
• To change the time, select the time number and click the spin button.

5. Click [OK].
• The specified date and time is displayed in the Time field.

6. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

7. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The document will be queued to print at the specified time and date.

— Printing Private Print Jobs

The private print feature permits sensitive or confidential documents to be printed only
in the presence of the person who sent the job.

Printing confidential documents

1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Private Print” and enter
a 1 to 63 digits document identification number in the “Pass-
word” field.

NOTE: This number will be used to release the private job from the Touch Panel Display. If you
forget this number, you can no longer print the private print job.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

240 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.

• The print job is stored in the Private Job list in the Touch Panel Display.

4. Press the [JOB STATUS] button on the control panel.

• The print job list is displayed.

5. Press the [PRIVATE] button.

6. Select the appropriate user name.

• The letter entry menu is displayed. Key in the password, which has previ-
ously been set from the client PC, and then press the [ENTER] button.
• You can key in the Admin Password by pressing the [ADMIN. PASSWORD]
button instead of keying in the password, previously set from the client PC.
In this case, jobs can be deleted but not printed.
• The private print job list is displayed.

NOTE: If private print jobs are submitted using different password from the same user, the user
names will be displayed for each password.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 241

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

7. Select the job you want to print on the private print job list.

• If the corresponding job is not displayed on the page, press the [Prev] or
[Next] button to switch the page.
• To select all jobs on the private print job list, press the [SELECT ALL] button.
To clear the selection, press the [ALL CLEAR] button.

8. Press the [RELEASE] button.

• Printing starts.
• The printing status can be confirmed on the print job list.

— Printing Proof Print Jobs

The proof print feature prevents costly mistakes by allowing you to check the printed
output on a sample copy before printing an entire multi-copy job

Printing a proof copy

1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Proof Print”.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• One copy of the document is printed and the print job is stored in the Proof
Job list in the Touch Panel Display.

SUPPLEMENT: You can release the remaining copies of a proof job from the Proof Job list in the Touch
Panel Display. Please refer to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for this instruc-
tion.

242 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Creating An Overlay File

You can print a document as an overlay file. The created overlay file can then be
merged into another document during printing.
P.257 "Printing with an Overlay File"

NOTES: • If the print job has several pages in the document, only the first page of the docu-
ment will be saved as an overlay file.
• Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay
image must be created at the same size, orientation, and resolution.

Printing a document as an overlay file

1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Print to Overlay File”.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

• The Overlay Image Name dialog box appears.

3. Enter a overlay image name and then click [OK].

• You can enter up to 63 characters.

4. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.

• The document is saved as an overly file.

SUPPLEMENT: You can use created overly file to print a document.

P.257 "Printing with an Overlay File"

— Storing to e-Filing
The Store to e-Filing feature allows you to send print jobs to e-Filing on this equipment.
The job stored to e-Filing can then be print from the Touch Panel Display at a later time.
It can be also composed with other documents using the e-Filing web utility.
You can store a print job to either public box or user box. The public box is shared by all
users who can see the jobs stored in this box. The user box is for personal use and is
protected by password.

NOTE: When you store a document in e-Filing using the printer driver, the printing image (not
the original document in your computer) will be stored in e-Filing.

SUPPLEMENTS: • You can manage the files within a box from the Touch Panel Display. Please refer to
the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function to manage files in a box.
• You can also manage the files within a box using the e-Filing web utility. Please
refer to the e-Filing Guide.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 243

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Saving a print job to a public box

1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Store to e-Filing”. Then
select “Public Box” to save a print job to a public box.

2. If you print a job as well as saving to the public box, check

the “Print” box.
3. Set other print options you require and click [OK].
4. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is saved to a public box.

Saving a print job to a user box

1. Display the Print Job tab and select “Store to e-Filing”. Then
select user box number to be save.

2. Enter the password for the user box in the “Password” field.

3. If you print a job as well as saving to a box, check the “Print”

box.
4. Set other print options you require and click [OK].
5. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is saved to a specified user box.

Printing with Various Layout and Finishing Options

Printer drivers allows you to create a print job with layout options to make your docu-
ment more essential. Also you can enable finishing options that determine how the jobs
are output, such as stapling and hole punching, sorting, and creating a booklet.

— Sort Printing
You can select how multiple copies of a document to be output, such as separately for
each copy, grouping each page, and alternating the paper direction for each copies.

244 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Output each copy separately

1. Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be

printed at the “Number of Copies” field. Then select “Sort
Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down box.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is output separately for each copy.

Output with grouping of each page within a set

For example, assume that you have a three page job (A, B, C) and you want three cop-
ies of each page in this order (AAA, BBB, CCC).

1. Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be

printed at the “Number of Copies” field. Then select “Group
Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down box.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is output separately for each page.

Output in a different direction for each copy

NOTE: Rotated Sort Copies can be enabled only when printing on Letter, A4, or B5.

1. Display the Setup tab and enter the number of copies to be

printed at the “Number of Copies” field. Then select
“Rotated Sort Copies” at the “Copy Handling” drop down
box.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 245

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.

• The print job is output in different direction for each copy.

— Enlarge/Reduce Printing
You can automatically enlarge or reduce a document image to fit a specified paper size,
or manually set the zoom ratio to enlarge or reduce the image.

Printing enlarged or reduced image to fit specified paper size

1. Display the Setup tab and select the document size on the
“Original Paper Size” drop down box. Then select the paper
size that you want to print at the “Print Paper Size” drop
down box.

• The document image is automatically enlarged or reduced depending on the

original paper size and print paper size.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• Enlarged or reduced image is printed to fit specified paper size.

Printing an enlarged or reduced image by specifying the zoom

ratio manually

1. Display the Setup tab and check the “Manual Scale” box.
Then enter the percentage of zoom ratio.

• The zoom ratio can be set from 25% to 400% in units of 1%.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• Enlarged or reduced image is printed by specified zoom ratio.

— Printing Color Document in Gray scale

This equipment can print in color as well as black and white.
The printer driver automatically detects whether the document uses only color or only
black and white, and it prints the document accordingly.
Additionally, you can select black and white mode manually to print a color document in
gray scale to reduce the print cost and consumption of color toners.

246 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTE: This is only available for PCL5c printer driver and PS3 printer driver.

Printing a color document in gray scale

1. Display the Setup tab and select “Mono” at the “Color” drop
down box.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is printed in gray scale.

— Stapling and Hole Punching

You can staple and punch the paper.

NOTES: • Stapling is not available if a finisher is not installed.

• Hole Punching is not available if a hole punch unit is not installed.

Stapling the paper

1. Display the Setup tab and select how to staple at the “Staple”
drop down box.

Upper Left — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper left.
Center Top — Select this to staple the printed document double in the upper
side.
Upper Right — Select this to staple the printed document in the upper right.
Middle Left — Select this to staple the printed document double in the left.
Center Double — Select this to fold and staple the printed document double in
the center.

NOTES: • The selectable options vary depending on the paper size.

• “Center Top” can be selected only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed and
configured on the Configuration tab.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The output is stapled for each copy.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 247

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Punching holes

1. Display the Setup tab and select how to punch holes at the
“Hole Punch” drop down box.

Center Top — Select this to create holes on the upper side.

Middle Left — Select this to create holes on the left side.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The output is hole punched.

— Printing on Both Sides of a Sheet

You can print on both sides of the paper.

Printing both sides of paper

1. Display the Setup tab and select the direction to be printed at

the “2-Sided Printing” drop down box.

Book — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertically direction, so
the pages can be bound and turned over right and left.
Tablet — Select this to print on both sides of the paper in a vertical reversal
motion, so the pages can be bound and turned over up and down.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is printed on both side of paper in the specified direction.

— Printing or Inserting Sheets from Different Paper Sources

You can print paper for covers, back covers, or for insert between pages by feeding
from different paper source. This is useful when you want to print or insert a color cover
and color sheets in front of every chapter in a document.

SUPPLEMENTS: • A front cover can be also printed or inserted for booklet printing by setting it in the
Booklet window.
P.250 "Printing Booklets"
• A front cover and back cover can be also printed or inserted for N-up printing by set-
ting it in the Multiple Pages per Sheet window.
P.252 "Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet"

248 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Printing or inserting a front cover and back cover

1. Display the Standard window of the Layout tab.

2. To print or insert a front cover, check the “Use Front Cover”
box and select the drawer where the cover paper is loaded at
the “Source” drop down box. Then select whether inserting
a blank cover or printed front cover at the “Print Style” drop
down box.

Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.

Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page of the document on
a front side of a cover.
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages of the
document on both sides of a cover.

NOTES: • When “Automatic” is selected in the “Source” drop down box, the paper is automati-
cally selected according to the printed document size.
• “Print on both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at
the Setup tab.

3. To print or insert a back cover, check the “Use Back Cover”

box and set the “Source” and “Print Style” options that you
require.

• How to set the Source and Print Style options are the same as “Use Front
Cover” option.

4. To print or insert sheets between the pages, check the

“Insert Pages” box and set the “Source” and “Print Style”
options as you require. Then enter the page numbers the
sheets will be inserted.

• How to set the Source and Print Style options are same as “Use Front Cover”
option.
• If you want to enter more than one page in the “Pages” field, separate the
page numbers with commas.
• When you select “Print on 1 side of page”, specified page will be printed on
the inserted sheet.
• When you select “Print on both sides of page”, specified page and the next
page will be printed on the both sides of the inserted sheet.

5. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 249

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

6. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.

• A front cover and back cover are printed or inserted for output.

— Interleaving Pages
This feature is useful when you want to insert paper of a different type, or from another
source, between every page of your print job. For example, you could use this option to
insert blank, colored sheets between overhead transparencies.

SUPPLEMENT: Interleaving pages can also be enabled for N-up printing by setting it in the Multiple
Pages per Sheet window.
P.252 "Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet"

Inserting sheets every page of a print job

1. Display the Standard window of Layout tab.

2. To insert sheets between every page, check the “Interleave
Pages” box and select the drawer where the paper for a
cover is loaded at the “Source” drop down box.

NOTE: When “Automatic” is selected in the “Source” drop down box, the paper is automatically
selected according to the printed document size.

3. To print the previous page on interleaved sheets, check on

“Duplicate” box.
• This equipment prints every previous page on interleaved sheets which are
inserted after the page so that you can duplicate a document.

4. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

5. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• Sheets are interleaved between every page.

— Printing Booklets
Printing in normal booklet mode produces a document that, when folded, becomes a
properly paginated booklet or magazine-style publication. You can even create bound
booklets that are folded and stapled in the center.
For example, if you create a document on letter-size paper (8½ x 11 inches) and then
print in booklet mode, the yield is a 5½-x-8½-inch booklet. Each page has been scaled
to fit on half a sheet and reordered so that the booklet is properly paginated when
folded.
To retain your original document size when printing booklets, select the booklet size
same as your original document size. Then, your 8½-inch document is printed on led-
ger size paper (11 x 17 inches) and reordered so that, when folded, the yield is an 8½-
x-11-inch booklet. You can select from the following page-size options when printing a
tiled booklet:
• Letter Booklet on Ledger
• A4 Booklet on A3
• B5 Booklet on B4

250 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Creating a booklet

1. Display the Booklet window of Layout tab.

2. Select the a booklet size at the “Output Document Layout”
drop down box.

A5 on A4 — Select this to print a A5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on

A4 paper to fit on half a sheet (A5).
A4 on A3 — Select this to print a A4 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
A3 paper to fit on half a sheet (A4).
B5 on B4 — Select this to print a B5 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
B4 paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).
Letter-Half on Letter — Select this to print a 1/2 Letter size booklet. Every 2
pages are printed on Letter paper to fit on half a sheet.
LT on LD — Select this to print a Letter size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on Ledger paper to fit on half a sheet (Letter).
A6 on A5 — Select this to print a A6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
A5 paper to fit on half a sheet (A6).
B6 on B5 — Select this to print a B6 size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed on
B5 paper to fit on half a sheet (B5).
1/2 LG on LG — Select this to print a 1/2 Legal size booklet. Every 2 pages are
printed on Legal paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 Comp on Comp — Select this to print a 1/2 Computer size booklet. Every 2
pages are printed on Computer paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 Folio on Folio — Select this to print a 1/2 Folio size booklet. Every 2 pages
are printed on Folio paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 Statement on Statement — Select this to print a 1/2 Statement size booklet.
Every 2 pages are printed on Statement paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 13’LG on 13’LG — Select this to print a 1/2 13inchLG size booklet. Every 2
pages are printed on 13inchLG paper to fit on half a sheet.
1/2 8.5’SQ on 8.5’SQ — Select this to print a 1/2 8.5inchSQ size booklet. Every
2 pages are printed on 8.5inchSQ paper to fit on half a sheet.
32K on 16K — Select this to print a 32K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on 16K paper to fit on half a sheet.
16K on 8K — Select this to print a 16K size booklet. Every 2 pages are printed
on 8K paper to fit on half a sheet.

3. If you want to add a margin space between facing pages,

enter a width in the “Center Margin” field.

• You can change the unit of the margin at the “Units” drop down box.
• The center margin can be set from 0.000 inch to 0.500 inches in units of 0.01
inch when the unit is inch, and from 0.000 mm to 12.700 mm in units of 0.10
mm when the unit is mm.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 251

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

4. If you want to add a margin on the outside edge, enter a

width in the “Outer Margin” field.

• You can change the unit of the margin at the “Units” drop down box.
• The center margin can be set from 0.000 inch to 1.00 inches in units of 0.01
inch when the unit is inch, and from 0.000 mm to 25.40 mm in units of 0.10
mm when the unit is mm.

5. If you want to double staple the center, check the “Staple

Down the Center” box.

NOTE: “Staple Down the Center” is available only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed
and configured on the Configuration tab.

6. If you want to create a booklet that can be read from right to

left, check the “Number Pages from Right to Left” box.

7. If you want to print or insert a front cover, check the “Use

Front Cover” box and then select, at the “Source” drop down
box, the drawer where the front cover is loaded. Also, at the
“Print Style” drop down box, select whether you are insert-
ing a blank cover or printed front cover.

Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.

Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages and last
two page of document on both sides of a cover.

NOTES: • When “Automatic” is selected in the “Source” drop down box, the paper is automati-
cally selected according to the printed document size.
• The last two page will not be printed or printed only one page if there are no
remained pages or only a last page for the cover.

8. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

9. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is printed as a booklet.

NOTE: If a Saddle-stitch Finisher is not installed, the output will not be folded. But you can cre-
ate a booklet by folding along the center by yourself.

— Printing Several Reduced Pages per Sheet

The N-up feature allows you to condense and print several pages of a document on one
sheet of paper. This feature is very useful for browsing a large number of pages for
appearance or page order.

252 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

For example, to check the navigation path of a number of web pages or review the nar-
rative of a slide presentation, using N-up is not only convenient but conserves paper as
well.

SUPPLEMENT: If you are using the Image Overlay feature in combination with N-up printing, the over-
lay prints once per sheet, rather than once per page.

Printing multiple pages per sheet

1. Display the Multiple Pages per Sheet window on the Layout

tab.
2. Select how many multiple pages you want to print on a single
sheet at the “Number of pages per Sheet” drop down box.

2 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged left
to right (when the orientation is portrait) or from top to bottom (when the
orientation is landscape) on one sheet.
2 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged
right to left (when the orientation is portrait) or from bottom to top (when the
orientation is landscape) on one sheet.
4 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
4 pages: Right to Left — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged
horizontally from the right and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
4 pages: Left to Right by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages
arranged vertically from the top and printed left to right on one sheet.
4 pages: Right to Left by Column — Select this to print images from 4 pages
arranged vertically from the top and printed right to left on one sheet.
6 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
8 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 8 pages arranged
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
9 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.
16 pages: Left to Right — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged
horizontally from the left and printed top to bottom on one sheet.

3. If you want to draw a line around each page, check the “Draw
Border Around Pages” box.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 253

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

4. If you want to print or insert a front cover, check the “Use

Front Cover” box and then select, at the “Source” drop down
box, the drawer where the front cover is loaded. Also, at the
“Print Style” drop down box, select whether you are insert-
ing a blank cover or printed front cover.

Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank front cover.

Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page of document on the
front side of the cover.
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the first two pages of
document on both sides of the cover.

NOTES: • When “Automatic” is selected in the “Source” drop down box, the paper is automati-
cally selected according to the printed document size.
• “Print on both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at
the Setup tab.

5. If you want to print or insert a back cover, check the “Use

Back Cover” box and then select, at the “Source” drop down
box, the drawer where the back cover is loaded. Also, at the
“Print Style” drop down box, select whether you are insert-
ing a blank cover or printed back cover.

Do not print on page — Select this to insert a blank back cover.

Print on 1 side of page — Select this to print the first page of document on the
front side of the back cover.
Print on both sides of page — Select this to print the last pages of document
on both sides of the back cover.

NOTES: • When “Automatic” is selected in the “Source” drop down box, the paper is automati-
cally selected according to the printed document size.
• “Print on both sides of page” is available only when 2-Sided printing is enabled at
the Setup tab.
• Only one page will be printed on the back cover when only one page is remained for
the back cover page, even if “Print on both sides of page” is selected.

254 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

6. If you want to insert sheets between every page, check the

“Interleave Pages” box and select the drawer where the
interleaved sheets are loaded at the “Source” drop down
box.

• If you want to print every previous page on interleaved sheets that are
inserted after the page, check on “Duplicate” box.

NOTE: When “Automatic” is selected in the “Source” drop down box, the paper is automatically
selected according to the printed document size.

7. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

8. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• Multiple pages are printed per sheet.

— Using Watermarks
Watermarks overprint your document with useful information, such as “Confidential,”
“Draft,” or “Original.” You can choose from several predefined watermarks or you can
create and save your own custom watermarks.
Watermarks are text only. To add graphics or other document elements, use image
overlays instead.

Printing a watermark

1. Display the Effect tab and select the watermark to be printed

at the “Watermark” drop down box.

NOTE: You can create a new watermark if the watermark that you prefer is not listed in the drop
down box.

2. If you want to print the watermark on only the first page,

check on the “Print on first page only” box.

3. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

4. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is printed with the watermark.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 255

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Creating or editing a watermark

1. Click [Add] to create new watermark, or select a watermark

that you want to edit and click [Edit] to edit a watermark.

• The Watermark dialog box appears.

2. Enter the watermark text in the “Caption” field.

• You can enter up to 63 characters for the “Caption” field.

3. Select a font for the watermark at the “Font Name” drop

down box.
NOTE: Do not select the symbol font such as “Symbol”, “Webdings”, and so on. The symbol
font will not apply to the watermark text.

4. Select a font style for the watermark at the “Style” drop down
box.
5. Select a color for the watermark at the “Color” drop down
box.
• If your preferred color is not listed in the drop down box, click [Browse...] to
display the color palette and add your color.

NOTES: • The “Color” drop down box is not available for the PCL6 printer driver.
• When “Mono” is selected at the “Color” drop down box on the Setup tab, the “Color”
drop down box is not available.

6. Enter the font size in the “Font Size” field.

• You can enter any integer between 6 to 300pt in units of 1pt.

256 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

7. To rotate the watermark, enter the degrees in the “Angle”

field.
• You can enter from -90 degrees to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree in the
“Angle” field.
• You can also set the angle using the scroll bar.

8. Select how the watermark text is printed from “Solid”, “Draw

as Outline”, and “Transparency”.
Solid — Select this to print solid type of watermark.
Draw as Outline — Select this to print an outline type of watermark.
Transparency — Select this for a transparent watermark. Set the transparent
ratio from 0 to 100% in units of 1%. You can also set the transparent ratio using
the scroll bar.

9. Click [OK] to save the watermark settings.

• The watermark is added or edited.

Deleting a watermark

NOTE: You can delete the default watermarks. However, they cannot be restored by clicking
the [Restore Defaults] button.

1. Select a watermark that you want to delete at the “Water-

mark” drop down box.

2. Click [Delete].

— Printing with an Overlay File

Using image overlays ensures that widely-used images are readily available and con-
sistently reproduced. Image overlays are independent documents that are merged into
other documents during printing and thereby increase the time required to print a job.
To superimpose text on your document, it may be faster to use watermarks.
To print with an overlay file, you should create an overlay file first.
P.243 "Creating An Overlay File"

NOTES: • If you use Image Overlays in combination with the N-up feature, the image overlay
is printed once per sheet, not once per page.
• Both the overlay file and the documents on which you superimpose the overlay
image must be created at the same size, orientation, color mode, and resolution.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 257

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Printing an overlay image on a print job

1. Display the Effect tab and select the overlay image name to
be used in the “Overlay Image” drop down box.

2. Set other print options you require and click [OK].

3. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is printed with the overlay image.

— Printing on a Tab Paper

This equipment supports tab printing, which can print in the tab extension of the tab
paper.

NOTES: • This equipment can print only on the Letter sized or A4 sized tab paper.
• If mis-printing occurs while multiple tab pages are printed continuously, dirt may
adhere to the reverse side of a paper. To avoid this, it is recommended to print a tab
paper as a separated job for each page so that this equipment performs cleaning
before printing next tab paper.
• When printing tab paper, the tab paper may be caught in the exit in the inner tray
because the roller to deliver the tab extension does not exit. In that case, remove
the tab paper before printing a next job.

Printing a document on a tab paper

1. Create a Letter sized or A4 sized document and place the text

or object that should appear on the tab extension as
described below.
Width of Tab Extension = Image Shift Margin
More than 0.08" or 2mm
Document Printed Image
Tab Text

Tab Text

Must exactly
fit the tab extension

When you create a document for tab printing, place the text or object that should
appear on the tab extension on the right side of the document. You must place
the text in the height exactly to fit to the tab extension. Also the right margin, a
margin between the text and right edge of the document, must have more than
0.08 inch or 2 mm space because the equipment cannot print in the space.

258 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2. Place tab paper on the drawer or bypass tray.

• When placing the tab paper on the bypass tray, place the tab paper so that
the tab side becomes outside.

Place the tab paper

so that the tab side
becomes outside.

3. When printing a document, display the [Setup] tab of the

printer driver properties, select document size in the “Origi-
nal Paper Size” drop down box, and select either “Letter
Tab” or “A4 Tab” (according to the document size) in the
“Print Paper Size” drop down box.

• The Primary Tab Dialog dialog box appears.

4. In the “Tab Manufacturer” drop down box, select the product

name of the tab paper that you use, or select “Custom” when
you use other manufactured tab paper.

5. When you select “Custom” in the “Tab Manufacturer” option,

enter the width of tab extension in the “Tab Extension” field.
6. Enter the width to shift the printed image in the “Image Shift
Margin” filed.
• If you create a document as described in Step 1, enter the width of the tab
extension here.

NOTE: This equipment cannot print in the 0.08 inch or 2 mm margin area on the right side on
the paper. Therefore, be sure to enter the image shift margin so that an image will be
printed within the printable area.

Printing Guide — Printing from Windows 259

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

7. Click [OK].
8. Set other print options you require and click [OK].
9. Click [OK] or [Print] to send a print job.
• The print job is printed on the tab paper.

260 Printing Guide — Printing from Windows

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Printing from Macintosh

This equipment supports printing from Macintosh applications.

NOTE: When the User Authentication is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are sent
from Macintosh computers are proceed as invalid jobs according to the Department
Code Enforcement setting.

Printing from Application on Mac OS 8.6 to 9.x

Once you have installed the PPD file as described in the section "Installing the Printer
on Mac OS 8.6/9.x" on page 150, you can print directly from most Mac OS applications.

How to Print from Mac OS 8.6 or 9.x

Before you can print to this equipment from applications, you must select it in the
Chooser. Then, using the LaserWriter 8 printer driver and the correct PostScript Printer
Description file (PPD), you can control the system’s various printing features by specify-
ing job settings from print dialog boxes.

— Selecting the Printer in the Chooser

Before printing from applications, you must select the equipment in the Chooser.

Setting the LaserWriter 8 printer in the Chooser

1. Click Apple menu and select [Chooser].

• The Chooser window appears.

2. Select the LaserWriter 8 icon and select the equipment in the

“Select a PostScript Printer” list.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 261

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3. Close the Chooser window.

• The LaserWriter 8 printer driver remains selected as the current printer until
you choose a new printer.

— Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computer

In Mac OS applications, print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and
the Print dialog box.

Printing from Macintosh applications

1. Open a file and select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
the application.
2. Select the name of the equipment at the “Format for” drop
down box and specify the Page Setup settings for your print
job.

• Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a docu-
ment.
P.263 "Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"

3. Click [OK] to save the Page Setup settings.

4. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
5. In the dialog box that appears, make sure the name of the
equipment is selected at the “Printer” menu and specify the
Print settings for your print job.

• Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a docu-
ment.
P.264 "Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"

262 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

6. Click [Print] to print a document.

Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Page Setup] com-
mand from the [File] menu of the application.
In the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can specify the Page Attribute settings.

NOTES: • The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications.

• The PostScript Options window contains the setting items that are generally pro-
vided by the LaserWriter 8 printer driver. For details of the PostScript Options,
please refer to the Balloon Help on the Mac OS.

— Page Attributes
In the Page Attributes menu, you can specify the paper size, orientation, and scale.

1) Format for
This selects the printer to be used for printing.
2) Paper
This selects the size of a document to be printed.
Available original paper sizes are listed below:

• Letter • A4
• Ledger • A5
• Legal • A3
• Statement • B4
• Computer • B5
• 13”LG • A3-Wide
• 8.5”SQ • Folio
• (12 x 18”) • A6
• 8K
• 16K

SUPPLEMENTS: • The default paper size will be “Letter” or “A4” according to the regional setting in the
Windows.
• “A3-Wide” is displayed only for the european version, and “(12 x 18”)” is displayed
only for the US version.
• “(12 x 18”)” and “A3-Wide” are not available when the Hanging Finisher is installed.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 263

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

3) Orientation
This sets the paper printing direction.
- Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.
- Landscape — The document is printed in the landscape direction.
4) Scale
This changes the size of the printed image on the page. Enter the zoom ratio to
enlarge or reduce an image. You can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom
ratio.

Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS 8.6/9.x

The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Print] command from the
[File] menu of the application.
In the Print dialog boxes, you can display the General window, Background Printing
window, Color Matching window, Cover Page window, Font Settings window, Job Log-
ging window, Layout window, Save as File window, Finishing Options window, Printing
Modes window, Booklet Mode Options window, Watermark Options window, and Qual-
ity window.

NOTES: • The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.

• The Save as File window contains the setting items that are generally provided by
the LaserWriter 8 printer driver. For details of the Save as File window, please refer
to the Balloon Help on the Mac OS.

— General
In the General menu, you can set the general print options such as number of copies,
sort printing.

1 2

1) Copies
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 9999.
2) Collated
Check this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...)
3) Pages
This sets the pages to be printed.
- All — Select this to print all pages.
- From/To — Select this to specify the pages to be printed. Enter the page range
in the From and To field.

264 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

4) Paper Source
This selects the source for feeding paper. Please select a paper source that corre-
lates with the printing size.
- All pages from — Select this to use the same paper source for all pages. Select
the paper source or paper type at the pop-up menu on the right.
- First page from — Select this to use the different paper source for the first page
from the remaining pages. Select the paper source or paper type for the first
page at the pop-up menu on the right.
- Remaining from — Select the paper source or paper type for the remaining
pages at the pop-up menu on the right when you select the First page from
option.

— Background Printing
In the Background Printing menu, you can set how the print job is spooled.

1) Print in
This sets how the print job is spooled.
- Foreground (no spool file) — Select this to disable any operation on the com-
puter until printing is completed.
- Background — Select this to enable any operation on the computer during
printing.
2) Print Time
This sets the schedule for printing.
- Urgent — Select this to print a job immediately.
- Normal — Select this to print a job normally.
- Print at — Select this to specify the time that the print job is sent to this equip-
ment. Specify the time and date when this is selected.
- Put Document on Hold — Select this to hold the print job in the desktop print
queue. To send the print job held in the desktop print queue, double-click the
printer icon on the desktop and activate the print job.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 265

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Color Matching
This sets the color matching for printing.

1) Print Color
Select “Color/Grayscale” to print to this equipment. Other selections are not sup-
ported by this equipment.
2) Intent
Do not specify this because “ColorSync Color Matching” and “PostScript Color
Matching” at the “Print Color” drop down box are not supported.
3) Printer Profile
Do not specify this because “ColorSync Color Matching” and “PostScript Color
Matching” at the “Print Color” drop down box are not supported.

— Cover Page
In the Cover Page menu, you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page.
The banner page includes information about owner of the job, job name, application
name, date and time, printer name, and number of copies.

1) Print Cover Page

This sets how a banner page is inserted.
- None — Select this not to print a banner page.
- Before Document — Select this to print a banner page before the document.
When this is selected, select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source
option.

266 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- After Document — Select this to print a banner page after the document. When
this is selected, select the paper source at the Cover Page Paper Source option.
2) Cover Page Paper Source
Select the paper source when you set to print a banner page.

— Font Settings
In the Font Settings menu, you can set how the fonts are printed.

2
3
4

1) Annotate Font Keys

Check this to annotate font keys for printing.
2) Preferred Format
This sets the whether Type 1 fonts or TrueType fonts are used for printing.
- Type 1 — Select this to print fonts using Type 1 fonts.
- TrueType — Select this to print fonts using TrueType fonts.
3) Always Download needed fonts
Check this to always download fonts for printing.
4) Never generate Type 42 format
Check this not to generate the Type 42 format.

— Job Logging
In the Job Logging menu, you can set the error handling and generate job logs.

1 3

1) If there is PostScript error

This sets whether reporting the error or not.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 267

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- No special reporting — Select this not to report an error.

- Summarize on screen — Select this to report on the screen when a PostScript
error occurs.
- Print detailed report — Select this to print a detailed report when a PostScript
error occurs.
2) Job Documentation
This sets whether job logs or job copies are generated or not.
- Generate Job Copy — Check this to generate a job copy. If enabled, a job
copy is generated in the folder which is specified at the “Job Documentation
Folder”.
- Generate Job Log — Check this to generate a job log. If enabled, a job log is
generated in the folder which is specified at the “Job Documentation Folder”.
3) Job Documentation Folder
The folder where job copies and job logs are stored is displayed. To change the
folder, click [Change] and select a different folder.

— Layout
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing and 2-Sided printing.

1) Page per sheet

This sets the printing of multiple pages on one sheet. The pages are reduced to fit
the selected paper size automatically.
- 1 — Select this if do not wish to enable N-up printing.
- 2 — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.
- 4 — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged horizontally and printed
top to bottom on one sheet.
- 6 — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged horizontally and printed
top to bottom on one sheet.
- 9 — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged horizontally and printed
top to bottom on one sheet.
- 16 — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged horizontally and printed
top to bottom on one sheet.
- 4 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged
vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.
- 6 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged
vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.
- 9 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged
vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.
- 16 (Down Before Across) — Select this to print images from 16 pages
arranged vertically from the top and printed horizontally on one sheet.

268 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) Layout direction
This sets pages to be printed from left to right or right to left. It is available only
when the N-up printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
3) Border
Select whether a border line is to be drawn on each page. It is available only when
the N-up printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
- None — Select this if no border line to be drawn.
- Single hairline — Select this to draw a single hairline for the border.
- Single thin line — Select this to draw a single thin line for the border.
- Double hairline — Select this to draw a double hairline for the border.
- Double thin line — Select this to draw a double thin line for the border.
4) Print on Both Sides
Check this to print on both sides of the paper. When checked, select the binding
direction at the “Binding” option.
5) Binding
This sets the type of binding for 2-sided-printed pages.
- Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper.
The direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on
the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
2

1
2

- Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper.
The direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on
the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
1
2
2

— Finishing Options
In the Finishing Options menu, you can set the destination, hole punching and stapling
features.

1
2
3

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 269

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

1) Destination
This selects the output destination tray.
- Inner Tray — Select this when no finisher is installed.
- Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.
- Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.

NOTE: “Tray 1” and “Tray 2” are only available when the Hanging Finisher, Multi-staple Fin-
isher, or Saddle-stitch Finisher are installed.

2) Hole Punch
This sets whether or not a print job is hole punched.
- Off — Select this to print without hole punches.
- Long Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the left
side for the portrait document, or on the top for the landscape document.

- Short Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the top for
the portrait document, or on the right for the landscape document.

- Long Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on
the right side for the portrait document, or on the bottom for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on
the bottom for the portrait document, or on the left for the landscape document.

NOTE: This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.

3) Stapling
This sets whether a print job is stapled.
- Off — Select this to print without stapling.

270 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Upper Left (Portrait)/Upper Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

upper left for the portrait document, or in the upper right for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Middle Left (Portrait)/Middle Top (Landscape) — Select this to staple double

in the left for the portrait document, or in the top for the landscape document.

- Lower Left (Portrait)/Upper Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

lower left for the portrait document, or in the upper left for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Upper Right (Portrait)/Lower Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

upper right for the portrait document, or in the lower right for the landscape doc-
ument.

- Middle Right (Portrait)/Middle Bottom (Landscape) — Select this to staple

double in the right for the portrait document, or in the bottom for the landscape
document.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 271

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Lower Right (Portrait)/Lower Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

lower right for the portrait document, or in the lower left for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Middle Top (Portrait)/Middle Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple dou-

ble in the top for the portrait document, or in the right for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Middle Bottom (Portrait)/Middle Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple

double in the bottom for the portrait document, or in the left for the landscape
document.

- Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape) — Select this to staple

double in the center for a booklet to be printed. Select this only when booklet
printing is performed.

NOTES: • This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed.

• “Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape)” is displayed when you select
“Multi-position Stapler” or “Multi-position Stapler and Hole Punch” is selected in the
Installable Options settings during the installation. However, this option is available
only when the Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.

272 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Printing Modes
In the Printing Mode menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job.
This menu allows you to enable various system features such as Private Print and
Proof Print.

1
2
3
4

1) Print Mode
This sets the type of print job.
- Normal — Select this to print a job normally.
- Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multi-copy job then await your
approval before printing the remaining copies. The print job sent as a proof job
is saved in the proof job list on this equipment, and the remaining copies are not
printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equip-
ment. This option allows you to check the output before printing additional cop-
ies and thereby reduce paper waste.
- Private - Password — Select this to print a private job. When this is selected,
enter 5-digit Password in the field. The print job is saved in the private job
queue on this equipment, and not printed until you activate printing from the
Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option is useful when you want to
print a confidential document secured using a password. The user has to enter
the password to print the private job when activating printing from the Touch
Panel Display. It is recommended to specify the password when you select to
print a private job. If you do not specify the password, the private job uses
default password “00000”.
2) Department Code
Enter a user’s department code when this equipment is managed with department
codes. Please ask your administrator for your department code.

SUPPLEMENT: How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the
Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator
mode. When the Department Code Enforcement is set to “ON”, the invalid department
code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing.
When the Department Code Enforcement is set to “Print”, the invalid department code
print job will be printed. When the Department Code Enforcement is set to “Delete”, the
invalid department code print job will be deleted without printing.

3) Distinguish Thin Lines

Select whether you require thin line printing.
4) Do not Print Blank Pages
Select whether you require printing blank pages.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 273

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Booklet Mode Options

In the Booklet Mode Options menu, you can set booklet printing.

1
2
3
4

1) Booklet Page Size

Select a paper size to print a booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a
sheet before folding. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size you
specify here.

NOTE: When booklet is used with cover page, it is recommended to use AppleTalk printing
rather than LPR printing.

2) Booklet Page Layout

Select the direction to be printed.
- Right to Left — Select this to create a booklet can be read from right to left.
- Left to Right — Select this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.
3) Booklet Center Margin
Select the width of space added to the center. If there is not a preferred width in the
list, enter the width by points. You can enter from 0 point to 300 points in units of 1
point.
4) Booklet Outer Margin
Select the width of space added in the short-edge side on a sheet. If there is not a
preferred width in the list, enter the width by points. You can enter from 0 point to 18
points in units of 1 point.

274 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Watermark Options
In the Watermark Options (A) and Watermark Options (B) menu, you can enable water-
mark printing.

1
2
3
4
5

6
7

1) Watermarking
This sets the printing of a watermark.
2) Watermark Text
Select the watermark text to be printed. If there is not a preferred watermark in the
list, enter the watermark text in the field displayed.
3) Watermark Text Size
Select the font size of watermark text. If there is not a preferred font size in the list,
enter the font size by points. You can enter from 4 points to 400 points in units of 1
point.
4) Watermark Text Angle
Select the degree of angle for rotating the watermark text. If there is not a preferred
angle in the list, enter the degrees from -90 to 90 degrees in units of 1 degree.
5) Watermark Gray Level
Select the gray level of the watermark text color. If there is not preferred gray level
in the list, enter the percentage from 1% to 100% in units of 1%.
6) Watermark Font
Select the font family for the watermark text.
7) Watermark Position
Select the position of the watermark text. If there is not preferred position in the list,
enter the X position and Y position manually.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 275

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

8) Watermark Outline
Select the outline points or “Filled” to print a watermark as a solid text. If there is not
a preferred point listed, enter from 0.1 points to 20 points in units of 0.1 points.

— Quality
In the Quality menu, you can specify various image quality features.

1
2
3
4
5

1) Color Resolution Type

Select the combinations of color, resolution, and type.
- Mono Low-res Auto — Select this to print in black and white with low resolution
and automatic image quality type.
- Mono Low-res Detail — Select this to print in black and white with low resolu-
tion and detailed image quality type.
- Mono Low-res Smooth — Select this to print in black and white with low resolu-
tion and smoothing image quality type.
- Color Low-res General — Select this to print in color with low resolution and
general image quality type.
- Color Low-res Photo — Select this to print in color with low resolution and
photo image quality type.
- Color Low-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with low resolution
and presentation image quality type.
- Color Low-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with low resolution and
line art image quality type.
- Color High-res General — Select this to print in color with high resolution and
general image quality type.
- Color High-res Photo — Select this to print in color with high resolution and
photo image quality type.
- Color High-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with high resolution
and presentation image quality type.
- Color High-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with high resolution and
line art image quality type.
- Color Low-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with low resolution
on the transparency sheet.
- Color High-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with high resolution
on the transparency sheet.

NOTE: When the optional expansion memory is not installed, the job will not be printed if you
select “Color High-res General”, “Color High-res Photo”, Color High-res Presentation”,
“Color High-res LineArt”, or “Color High-res Transparency”.

276 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) Pure Black and Gray

Select whether printing the document in gray scale.
- Off — Select this to print the document in color mode.
- Pure Black only — Select this to print the contents in black where the percent-
age of all colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) is 100%.
- Pure Black and Pure Gray — Select this to print the contents in black where
the percentage of all color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is 100% (C=100% ->
K=100%, M=100% -> K=100%, Y=100% -> K=100%), and print the contents in
gray scale where the percentage of each color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is
the same percentage (C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).
3) Black Over Print
Select this when printing background content that has black text overlayed on it. If
this is not enabled, the background of the black content will not print. When you print
a document that has any of its content on background with black text overlayed,
enable this option.
4) Smoothing
Select whether printing the texts and graphics smoothly.
5) Toner Save
Select this to print in the toner save mode.

Printing from Application on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x

Once you have installed the PPD file as described in "Installing the Printer on Mac OS X
10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x" on page 156, you can print directly from most Mac OS
applications.

How to Print from Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X 10.3.x

All writers are managed within the Print Center utility and there is no need to switch the
printer.
Once you add a printer to the Printer List, all printers can be selected directly from Print
Setup dialog box.

— Setting Options and Printing from Macintosh Computers

In Mac OS applications, print options are set from both the Page Setup dialog box and
the Print dialog box.

Printing from Macintosh applications

1. Open a file and select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu of
the application.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 277

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2. Select the name of the equipment at the “Format for” drop

down box and specify the Page Setup settings for your print
job.

• Setting the Page Setup varies depending on how you want to print a docu-
ment.
P.278 "Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac
OS X 10.3.x"

3. Click [OK] to save the Page Setup settings.

4. Select [Print] from the [File] menu of the application.
5. In the dialog box that appears, make sure the name of the
equipment is selected at the “Printer” menu and specify the
Print settings for your print job.

• Setting the Print Setup varies depending on how you want to print a docu-
ment.
P.280 "Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac OS X
10.3.x"

6. Click [Print] to print a document.

Print Options for Page Setup Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4

to Mac OS X 10.3.x
The Page Setup dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Page Setup] com-
mand from the [File] menu of the application.
In the Page Setup dialog boxes, you can specify the Page Attribute settings.

NOTE: The Page Setup dialog boxes vary across applications.

278 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Page Attributes

1) Format for
This select the printer to be used for printing.
2) Paper Size
This selects the size of a document to be printed.
Available original paper sizes are listed below:

• US Letter • A4
• Tabloid (Ledger) • A5
• US Legal • A3
• Statement • JB4
• Computer • JB5
• 13”LG • A3-Wide
• 8.5”SQ • Folio
• (12 x 18”) • A6
• 8K
• 16K

SUPPLEMENTS: • The default paper size will be “Letter” or “A4” according to the regional setting in the
Windows.
• “A3-Wide” is displayed only for the european version, and “(12 x 18”)” is displayed
only for the US version.
• “(12 x 18”)” and “A3-Wide” are not available when the Hanging Finisher is installed.

3) Orientation
This sets the paper printing direction.
- Portrait — The document is printed in the portrait direction.
- Landscape (90 degree) — The document is printed in the landscape direction
from left.
- Landscape (270 degree) — The document is printed in the landscape direction
from right.
4) Scale
This changes the size of the printed image on the page. Enter the zoom ratio to
enlarge or reduce an image. You can set any integer from 25 to 400(%) for the zoom
ratio.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 279

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Print Options for Print Dialog on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to Mac

OS X 10.3.x
The Print dialog boxes can be displayed by selecting the [Print] command from the
[File] menu of the application.
In the Print dialog boxes, you can specify the Copies & Pages settings, Layout settings,
Duplex settings (only for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8), Output Options settings, Sched-
uler settings (only for Mac OS X 10.3.x), Cover Page settings (only for Mac OS X
10.3.x), Paper Handling settings (only for Mac OS X 10.3.x), Paper Feed settings, Error
Handling settings, Print Mode settings (only for Mac OS 10.3.x only) and Printer Fea-
ture settings.

The menus in the Print dialog box are different between Mac OS 10.2.x and Mac OS X
10.3.x. The following table shows the menus that are displayed for each Mac OS ver-
sion and references the descriptions of the screens.

Menu Submenu 10.2.x 10.3.x References

Copies & Pages 9 9 P.281 "Copies & Pages"

Layout 9 9 P.281 "Layout"

Duplex 9 P.283 "Duplex"

Output Options 9 9 P.284 "Output Options"

Scheduler 9 P.285 "Scheduler"

Paper Handling 9 P.285 "Paper Handling"

Cover Page 9 P.286 "Cover Page"

Error Handling 9 9 P.287 "Error Handling"

Paper Feed 9 9 P.287 "Paper Feed"

Print Mode 9 P.288 "Print Mode"

Printer Features Printing Modes 9 P.289 "Printing Modes"

Quality 9 9 P.290 "Quality"

Private Docu- 9 P.292 "Private Document Pass-

ment Password word"

Finishing 9 9 P.293 "Finishing"

DC 9 P.296 "DC (Department Code)"

Booklet 9 9 P.297 "Booklet"

NOTE: The Print dialog boxes vary across applications.

280 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Copies & Pages

In the Copies & Pages menu, you can set you can set the general print options such as
number of copies, sort printing.

1 2
3

1) Copies
This sets the number of printed copies. You can set any integer from 1 to 9999.
2) Collated
Check this for sort-printing (1, 2, 3... 1, 2, 3...)
3) Pages
This sets the pages to be printed.
- All — Select this to print all pages.
- From — Select this to specify the pages to be printed. Enter the page range in
the From and To field.

— Layout
In the Layout menu, you can set N-up printing (multiple pages per sheets). The items in
the Layout menu vary depending on the Mac OS version.

For Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 281

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

For Mac OS X 10.3.x

3
4

1) Page per Sheet

This sets the number of multiple pages printed on one sheet. The pages are
reduced to fit the selected paper size automatically and are printed.
- 1 — Select this if do not wish to enable N-up printing.
- 2 — Select this to print images from 2 pages arranged on one sheet.
- 4 — Select this to print images from 4 pages arranged on one sheet.
- 6 — Select this to print images from 6 pages arranged on one sheet.
- 9 — Select this to print images from 9 pages arranged on one sheet.
- 16 — Select this to print images from 16 pages arranged on one sheet.
2) Layout Direction
This sets how pages are arranged on one sheet. This is available only when the N-
up printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
- Across Left to Right Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from left to
right and then top to bottom on one sheet.
- Across Right to Left Before Down — Pages arranged horizontally from right to
left and then top to bottom on one sheet.
- Down Before Across Left to Right — Pages arranged vertically from top to
down and then left to right on one sheet.
- Down Before Across Right to Left — Pages arranged vertically from top to
down and then right to left on one sheet.
3) Border
Select if a border line is to be drawn on each page. This is available only when the
N-up printing (printing a page on multiple sheets) is set.
- None — Select this if no border line is to be drawn.
- Single hairline — Select this to draw single hairline for the border.
- Single thin line — Select this to draw single thin line for the border.
- Double hairline — Select this to draw double hairline for the border.
- Double thin line — Select this to draw double thin line for the border.
4) Two Sided Printing
This sets whether or not you want to print on both sides of the paper.
- Off — Select this when you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.

282 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper.
The direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on
the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1

2
1

2
- Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper.
The direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on
the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
1

2
2

NOTE: This option is not displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8. When you want to enable 2-
Sided printing on Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, set the Duplex settings in the Duplex
menu.
P.283 "Duplex"

— Duplex
In the Duplex menu, you can set 2-Sided printing (printing on both sides of a sheet).

NOTE: This menu is displayed only for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8. When you want to enable
2-Sided printing on Mac OS X 10.3.x, set the Two Sided Printing option in the Layout
menu.
P.281 "Layout"

1 2

1) Print on Both Sides

Check this to print on both sides of the paper. When this is checked, select the
binding direction at the “Binding” option.
2) Binding
This sets the type of binding for 2-sided printed pages.
- Off — Select this when you do not want to print on both sides of the paper.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 283

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Long Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the long edge side of paper.
The direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on
the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1

2
1

2
- Short Edge Binding — Select this to bind along the short edge side of paper.
The direction to be printed on the back side of the paper differs depending on
the orientation.
Portrait Landscape
1
1

2
2

— Output Options
In the Output Options menu, you can save a print job as a file.

1 2

1) Save as File
Check this to save a print job as a file. When this is checked, select the file type at
the “Format” drop down box.
2) Format
This sets the format of a file to be saved.
- PDF — Select this to save a print job as a PDF file.
- PostScript — Select this to save a print job as a PS file.

284 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Scheduler
In the Scheduler menu, you can set when a print job will be sent to the equipment.

NOTE: This menu is displayed only for Mac OS X 10.3.x.

1) Print Document
This sets when a print job will be sent to the equipment.
- Now — Select this to send a print job now.
- At — Select this to specify the time to send a print job. When you select this,
specify the time to be send. The print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS
until the specified time has been reached or you resume the print job to be sent
from the queue on Mac OS.
- On Hold — Select this to hold a print job in the queue on Mac OS. When you
select this, the print job will be held in the queue on Mac OS until you resume the
print job to be sent from the queue on Mac OS.
2) Priority
Select the priority of a print job.

— Paper Handling
In the Paper Handling menu, you can set Reverse page order printing and Odd or Even
numbered page printing.

NOTE: This menu is only displayed for Mac OS X 10.3.x.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 285

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

1) Reverse page order

Check this when you want to print a document from the end of page.
2) Print
Select whether all pages will be printed or only odd or even pages will be printed.

— Cover Page
In the Cover Page menu, you can set whether a print job is sent with a banner page.
The banner page includes information about owner of the job, job name, application
name, date and time, printer name, and number of copies.

NOTE: This menu is only displayed for Mac OS X 10.3.x.

1) Print Cover Page

This sets how a banner page is inserted.
- None — Select this not to print a banner page.
- Before Document — Select this to print a banner page before the document.
- After Document — Select this to print a banner page after the document.
2) Cover Page Type
Select the type of a banner page.
3) Billing Info
Enter the billing information to have it appear on the banner page. You can enter up
to 24 characters.

286 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Error Handling
In the Error Handling menu, you can set how to report a PostScript error.

1) PostScript Error
This sets whether or not you want to print a PostScript error report.
- No special reporting — Select this if you do not want to print PostScript error
information.
- Print detailed report — Select this to print PostScript error information.
2) Tray Switching
This is not supported by this equipment.

— Paper Feed
In the Paper Feed menu, you can set the paper source.

2
3

1) All pages from

Select the option button when you want to use same paper source for all pages.
When this is selected, select the paper source or paper type to be used at the drop
down menu.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 287

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) First page from

Select the option button when you want to specify different paper source for a first
page and remaining pages. When this selected, select the paper source or paper
type to be used for a first page at the drop down menu.
3) Remaining from
Select the paper source or paper type to be used for remaining pages in the drop
down menu. This can be selected only when you select the option button of the
“First page from” option.

— Print Mode
In the Print Mode menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job. This
menu allows you to enable various job types such as Private Print and Proof Print.

NOTE: This menu is only displayed for Mac OS X 10.3.x. When you want to set the printing
mode in Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8, set in the Printing Modes submenu in the Printer
Features menu.
P.289 "Printing Modes"

1) Print Mode
This sets the type of print job.
- Normal — Select this to print a normal job.
- Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for
approval before printing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job,
is saved in the proof job queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are
not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option
allows you to check a job’s output before printing the remaining copies and
thereby reduce paper waste.
- Private — Select this to print a private job. When this is selected, specify the 5-
digit password in the field next to the drop down box. The print job is saved in
the private job queue on this equipment, and not printed until you activate print-
ing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option is useful when
you want to print a confidential document secured using a password. The user
has to enter the password to print the private job when activating printing from
the Touch Panel Display.

288 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) Department Code
Select whether a department code is required for printing. When this is enabled,
specify the 5-digit department code in the field next to the drop down box.
Enabling the department code depends on whether this equipment is managed with
department codes or not. Please ask your administrator for your department code.
3) Do not Print Blank Pages
Select whether you require printing blank pages.
4) Distinguish Thin Lines
Select whether you require printing thin lines clearly.

— Printer Features
In the Printer Features menu, you can set special printing features.

Printing Modes
In the Printing Modes menu, you can set the way this equipment handles the print job.
This menu allows you to enable various job types such as Private Print and Proof Print.

NOTE: This menu is only displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8. When you want to set the
printing mode in Mac OS X 10.3.x, set in the Print Mode menu.
P.288 "Print Mode"

1
2
3
4

1) Print Mode
This sets the type of print job.
- Normal — Select this to print a normal job.
- Proof — Select this to print the first copy of a multicopy job and then wait for
approval before printing the remaining copies. The print job, sent as a proof job,
is saved in the proof job queue on this equipment, and the remaining copies are
not printed until you activate printing from the Touch Panel Display. This option
allows you to check a job’s output before printing the remaining copies and
thereby reduce paper waste.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 289

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Private - Password — Select this to print a private job. When this is selected,
specify the 5-digit password in the Private Document Password menu. The print
job is saved in the private job queue on this equipment, and not printed until you
activate printing from the Touch Panel Display of this equipment. This option is
useful when you want to print a confidential document secured using a pass-
word. The user has to enter the password to print the private job when activat-
ing printing from the Touch Panel Display.
2) Department Code (DC) On
Check this if a department code is required for printing. When this is enabled, spec-
ify the 5-digit department code in the DC menu.
Enabling the department code depends on whether this equipment is managed with
department codes or not. Please ask your administrator for your department code.
3) Distinguish Thin Lines
Check this to print thin lines clearly.
4) Do not Print Blank Pages
Select whether you require printing blank pages.

Quality
In the Quality menu, you can specify various image quality features.

1
2
3

1) Color Resolution Type

Select the combinations of color, resolution, and type.
- Mono Low-res Auto — Select this to print in black and white with low resolution
and automatic image quality type.
- Mono Low-res Detail — Select this to print in black and white with low resolu-
tion and detailed image quality type.
- Mono Low-res Smooth — Select this to print in black and white with low resolu-
tion and smoothing image quality type.
- Color Low-res General — Select this to print in color with low resolution and
general image quality type.
- Color Low-res Photo — Select this to print in color with low resolution and
photo image quality type.
- Color Low-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with low resolution
and presentation image quality type.
- Color Low-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with low resolution and
line art image quality type.

290 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Color High-res General — Select this to print in color with high resolution and
general image quality type.
- Color High-res Photo — Select this to print in color with high resolution and
photo image quality type.
- Color High-res Presentation — Select this to print in color with high resolution
and presentation image quality type.
- Color High-res LineArt — Select this to print in color with high resolution and
line art image quality type.
- Color Low-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with low resolution
on the transparency sheet.
- Color High-res Transparency — Select this to print in color with high resolution
on the transparency sheet.

NOTE: When the optional expansion memory is not installed, the job will not be printed if you
select “Color High-res General”, “Color High-res Photo”, Color High-res Presentation”,
“Color High-res LineArt”, or “Color High-res Transparency”.

2) Pure Black and Gray

Select whether printing the document in gray scale.
- Off — Select this to print the document in color mode.
- Pure Black only — Select this to print the contents in black where the percent-
age of all colors (cyan, magenta, and yellow) is 100%.
- Pure Black and Pure Gray — Select this to print the contents in black where
the percentage of all color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is 100% (C=100% ->
K=100%, M=100% -> K=100%, Y=100% -> K=100%), and print the contents in
gray scale where the percentage of each color —cyan, magenta, and yellow— is
the same percentage (C=M=Y=n% -> K=n%).
3) Black Over Print
Select this when printing background content that has black text overlayed on it. If
this is not enabled, the background of the black content will not print. When you print
a document that has any of its content on background with black text overlayed,
enable this option.
4) Smoothing
Select whether printing the texts and graphics smoothly.
5) Toner Save
Select this to print in the toner save mode.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 291

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Private Document Password

In the Private Document Password menu, you can specify the Document ID number for
the private job. It is recommended to specify the Private Document Password when
you select to print a private job. If you do not specify the Private Document Password,
the private job uses default Private Document Password “00000”.

NOTE: This menu is only displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8. When you want to set the
Private Document Password in Mac OS X 10.3.x, set in the Print Mode menu.
P.288 "Print Mode"

2
3
4
5

1) Password - Digit 1
Select the first digit of the Document ID.
2) Password - Digit 2
Select the second digit of the Document ID.
3) Password - Digit 3
Select the third digit of the Document ID.
4) Password - Digit 4
Select the forth digit of the Document ID.
5) Password - Digit 5
Select the fifth digit of the Document ID.

292 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Finishing
In the Finishing menu, you can set destination, hole punching and stapling.

2
3

1) Destination
This selects the destination tray.
- Inner Tray — Select this when no finisher is installed.
- Tray 1 — Select this to route the output to the upper tray of the Finisher.
- Tray 2 — Select this to route the output to the lower tray of the Finisher.

NOTE: “Tray 1” and “Tray 2” are only available when the Hanging Finisher, Multi-staple Fin-
isher, or Saddle-stitch Finisher are installed.

2) Hole Punch
This sets whether or not a print job is hole punched.
- Off — Select this to print without hole punches.
- Long Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the left
side for the portrait document, or on the top for the landscape document.

- Short Edge Punch without rotation — Select this to create holes on the top for
the portrait document, or on the right for the landscape document.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 293

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Long Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on
the right side for the portrait document, or on the bottom for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Short Edge Punch with 180 degree rotation — Select this to create holes on
the bottom for the portrait document, or on the left for the landscape document.

NOTE: This option cannot be selected if a hole punch unit is not installed.

3) Stapling
This sets whether a print job is stapled.
- Off — Select this to print without stapling.
- Upper Left (Portrait)/Upper Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the
upper left for the portrait document, or in the upper right for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Middle Left (Portrait)/Middle Top (Landscape) — Select this to staple double

in the left for the portrait document, or in the top for the landscape document.

- Lower Left (Portrait)/Upper Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

lower left for the portrait document, or in the upper left for the landscape docu-
ment.

294 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Upper Right (Portrait)/Lower Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

upper right for the portrait document, or in the lower right for the landscape doc-
ument.

- Middle Right (Portrait)/Middle Bottom (Landscape) — Select this to staple

double in the right for the portrait document, or in the bottom for the landscape
document.

- Lower Right (Portrait)/Lower Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple in the

lower right for the portrait document, or in the lower left for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Middle Top (Portrait)/Middle Right (Landscape) — Select this to staple dou-

ble in the top for the portrait document, or in the right for the landscape docu-
ment.

- Middle Bottom (Portrait)/Middle Left (Landscape) — Select this to staple

double in the bottom for the portrait document, or in the left for the landscape
document.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 295

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

- Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape) — Select this to staple

double in the center for a booklet to be printed. Select this only when booklet
printing is performed.

NOTES: • This option cannot be selected if a finisher is not installed.

• “Saddle Stitch (Portrait)/Saddle Stitch (Landscape)” can be selected only when the
Saddle-stitch Finisher is installed.

DC (Department Code)
In the DC menu, you can specify your department code, if this equipment is enabled the
department codes. Before specifying the department code, you must check the Depart-
ment Code option in the Printing Modes menu. Then specify the department code in
this menu.

NOTE: This menu is only displayed for Mac OS X 10.2.4 to 10.2.8. When you want to set the
department code in Mac OS X 10.3.x, set in the Print Mode menu.
P.288 "Print Mode"

2
3
4
5

SUPPLEMENT: How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the
Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator
mode. When the Department Code Enforcement is set to "ON", the invalid department
code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing.
When the Department Code Enforcement is set to "Print", the invalid department code
print job will be printed. When the Department Code Enforcement is set to "Delete", the
invalid department code print job will be deleted without printing.

1) Department Code (DC) - Digit 1

Select the first digit of the department code.

296 Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

2) Department Code (DC) - Digit 2

Select the second digit of the department code.
3) Department Code (DC) - Digit 3
Select the third digit of the department code.
4) Department Code (DC) - Digit 4
Select the forth digit of the department code.
5) Department Code (DC) - Digit 1
Select the fifth digit of the department code.

Booklet
In the Booklet menu, you can set booklet printing.

2
3
4

1) Booklet Page Size

Select a paper size for the booklet. Each two pages are printed on both side of a
sheet which is then folded. The booklet size will be the half size of the paper size
that you specify.
2) Left to Right Page Layout
Check this to create a booklet can be read from left to right.
3) Booklet Center Margin
Select the width of space added to the center.
4) Booklet Outer Margin
Select the width of space added short edge side of a sheet.

Printing Guide — Printing from Macintosh 297

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Printing from UNIX

Printing from an Application
This section describes how to print from a UNIX workstation.

NOTES: • When the User Authentication is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are
sent from UNIX workstations are proceed as invalid jobs according to the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement setting.
• Before attempting to print from a UNIX workstation, make sure all the UNIX Filters
are installed in your workstation.
P.167 "Installing Client Software for UNIX"

Considerations and Limitations

• This equipment acts only as a filter and not as a complete driver. The size and
order of the printed pages cannot be modified.
• The UNIX filters do not support the following engine-supplied features:
- Enlarge/Reduce printing
- Rotate Sort
- N-up printing
- Watermarks
- Cover Sheets
- Sheet Insertion
- Scheduled Print
- Print to Overlay File
- Store to e-Filing
- Use Overlay Image
• Linux uses the lptap command to send a file to this equipment.
Since lp is not supported in all versions of Linux, the lptap command should be used
instead.
• AIX supports printing using the qdaemon. This can be invoked by the user with the
commands lp, lpr or qprt. In order to use the filter, either lp or qprt should be used.

Printing Using LP Command

Use the lp command (lptap in Linux) to send a file to this equipment for printing. This
command specifies various printer-specific options using the -o option parameter on the
command line. The lp command also sets other print options using various other
parameters. Use the man est451c.1 command to display the online document that
describes the various options and parameters that can be set to configure printed out-
put.
All the options are sent to this equipment at the start of a print job so, if the print file con-
tains its own commands, they may override the lp options.

Generic “lp” and “lptap” Options

— Copies
The number of copies of a print job is specified using the “-n value” parameter with the
“lp” command. The copy count is displayed on the banner page. The default value is
determined by the “lp” command and it is always 1. The copies are always collated.

298 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Title
The title that is printed on the banner page can be specified using the “-t title” parameter
with the “lp” command. The default value is determined by the “lp” command and it is
often the name of the print file. If multiple files are printed using the same “lp” command
the default title is set to the name of the first file by the “lp” command.

General Options
The following options apply to all print files.

NOTE: Option commands are case sensitive and must be entered exactly as shown.

— Print Language
The “net_est451c” program needs to know what printer language is used in each of the
files that it is printing so that it can issue the correct commands to select various
options. The following options are valid for the print languages.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

auto Each file to be printed is examined to see if it starts with

the “%!” sequence. If it does, then it is assumed that it is
a PostScript file, otherwise it assumes that it is a plain
text or a PCL6 file.

pcl The print file is always treated as a plain text or a PCL6

file.

postscript ps The file is always treated as a PostScript file.

raw The file is treated as a fully formatted file that already

contains all the necessary commands. The file is sent to
the printer without any modifications. In this mode no
other options are valid and a banner page is not printed.

All PCL5e jobs automatically send the “<esc>&k2G” command to convert the line-feed
character into a carriage-return – line-feed sequence. If the PCL5e job contains some of
its own escape sequences it may override this setting.
The default print language is “auto”.
Example: The command to specify that a file is PostScript is “lp –o ps filename”.

— Stapling
The staple position can be specified using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

staple=0 Stapling is turned off.

staple=1 Staple in the top left corner of a portrait page and the
upper right corner of a landscape page.

staple=2 Put two staples on the left side of a portrait page or the
top side of a landscape page printed on long-edge-feed
paper. This command has no affect when the paper is
fed from the short-edge side.

staple=3 Staple in the bottom left corner of a portrait page and

the upper left corner of a landscape page.

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 299

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Option Value Alternate Value Description

staple=4 Staple in the top right corner of a portrait page and the
bottom right corner of a landscape page.

staple=5 Put 2 staples on the right side of a portrait page or the

bottom side of a landscape page printed on long-edge-
feed paper. This command has no affect when the
paper is fed from the short-edge side.

staple=6 Staple in the bottom right corner of a portrait page and

the lower left corner of a landscape page.

staple=7 Put 2 staples on the top side of a portrait page or the

right side of a landscape page printed on short-edge-
feed large format (A3/Ledger) paper. This command
has no affect when the paper is fed from the long-edge
side or small paper size.

staple=8 Put 2 staples on the bottom side of a portrait page or

the left side of a landscape page printed on short-edge-
feed large format (A3/Ledger) paper. This command
has no affect when the paper is fed from the long-edge
side or small paper size.

staple=9 Put 2 staples in the middle of a landscape page and fold

the paper in half vertically along the staple line (saddle
stitching). This command works in conjunction with
booklet printing. This command has no affect when the
paper is fed from the long-edge side.
If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.
Example: The command to staple in the upper left corner of a long edge feed portrait
page is “lp –o staple=1 filename”.
The value for the stapling position depends on the paper size, the paper feed direction,
and the print direction. This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users
should refer to the copier manual for a list of compatible paper sizes. In particular, A5,
A6 and statement paper sizes will not work with this function.

— Output Bin
The output bin can be specified using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

inner Select the inner tray.

bin1 Select the upper output tray of the finisher.

bin2 Select the lower output tray of the finisher.

If the finisher option is not installed on the equipment, the default output tray will be
used (inner). If the finisher option is installed on the equipment, the default output tray
will be used (bin2).
Example: The command to specify output bin 1 is “lp –o bin1 filename”.

— Hole Punching
When the hole punch option is installed it can be activated using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

punch=0 nopunch Hole punching is turned off.

300 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Option Value Alternate Value Description

punch=1 Hole punch long edge without rotation.

punch=2 Hole punch short edge without rotation.

punch=3 Hole punch long edge with 180 degree rotation.

punch=4 Hole punch short edge with 180 degree rotation.

If this option is not specified, the default value of “nopunch” will be used.
This function is not available for all paper sizes and the users should refer to the copier
manual for a list of compatible paper sizes. In particular, A5, A6 and statement paper
sizes will not work with this function.
Example: The command to hole punch the long edge feed portrait page is
“lp –o punch=1 filename”.

— Media Type
The paper source can also be selected using the media type using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

mtype=Plain The paper source that contains Plain paper is

requested.

mtype= The paper source that contains transparency slides is

Transparency requested.

mtype=Thick1 The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is

requested.

mtype=Thick2 The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is

requested.

mtype=Thick3 The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is

requested.

In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has prior-
ity over the media type and the paper source.
In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source.
If this option is not specified, the default value will be used.
Example: The command to specify Thick1 media type is “lp –o mtype=Thick1 filename”.

— Paper Source
The paper source can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

auto-source Select auto paper tray selection.

manual Select stack feed bypass.

drawer1 upper Select the 1st drawer.

cas1

drawer2 lower Select the 2nd drawer.

cas2

drawer3 pedupper Select the 3rd drawer.

cas3

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 301

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Option Value Alternate Value Description

drawer4 pedlower Select the 4th drawer.

cas4

LCF lcf Select the LCF. LCF is not available for some countries
or regions.
In PostScript Deferred Media Selection is always turned on so the paper size has prior-
ity over the paper source. In PCL5e the paper size always has priority over the paper
source.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to specify the LCF paper source is “lp – o lcf filename”.

— Duplexing
The current duplex mode can be specified using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

simplex Turn duplexing off.

duplex lduplex Turn duplexing on with long edge binding.

duplex_long
duplex=long
hduplex

sduplex duplex_short Turn duplexing on with short edge binding.

duplex=short
vduplex

If this option is not specified, the default value “simplex” will be used.
It is not necessary to specify duplexing for Booklet Mode (sduplex). Setting duplexing
separately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing.
Example: The command to specify long edge duplexing is “lp –o duplex filename”.

— Paper Size
The current paper size can be specified using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

letter lt Select letter size paper.

LT

A4 a4 Select A4 size paper.

legal lg Select legal size paper.

LG

statement st Select statement size paper.

ST

ledger ld Select ledger size paper.

LD

folio folio-japan Select folio size paper.

A3 a3 Select A3 size paper.

A5 a5 Select A5 size paper.

A6 a6 Select A6 size paper.

302 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Option Value Alternate Value Description

B4 b4 Select JIS B4 size paper.

b4-jis
B4-JIS

B5 b5 Select JIS B5 size paper.

b5-jis
B5-JIS

computer co Select computer size paper.

CO

legal13 lg13 Select LG13inch size paper.

LG13

sq85 letter-square Select SQ8.5inch size paper.

8K 8k Select 8K size paper.

16K 16k Select 16K size paper.

If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.
Example: The command to specify the A4 paper size is “lp –o a4 filename”.

— Printing Modes
The printing mode can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

normal Process as a normal print job.

proof Process as a proof print job.

private=din Process as a private print job. The din is up to 63-digit

(between 1 to 63) password.

If this option is not specified, the printer’s default value will be used.
A private printing job requires the user to enter a maximum number of 63 character long
string.
Character lengths longer than 63 will be clipped to 63.
The following characters are invalid, but no type checking is carried out.
“& ‘ ( ) ; < > ˆ ` | ~

— Department Code
The department access code can be set using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

dept=code Set the department access code. The code is a 5-digit

numeric value.

SUPPLEMENT: How the equipment performs printing for an invalid department code print job, which no
department code or invalid department code is specified, varies depending on the
Department Code Enforcement setting that can be set from TopAccess Administrator
mode. When the Department Code Enforcement is set to "ON", the invalid department
code print job will be stored in the invalid department code print job list without printing.
When the Department Code Enforcement is set to "Print", the invalid department code
print job will be printed. When the Department Code Enforcement is set to "Delete", the
invalid department code print job will be deleted without printing.

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 303

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Smoothing
The smoothing mode can be set using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

smoothing=on ON Set the smoothing mode.

smoothing=off OFF Cancel the smoothing mode.

Example: The command to set the smoothing mode is “lp –o smoothing=on filename”.

— Distinguish Thin Lines

The thin line limit mode can be set using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

thinlinelimit=on ON Set the thin line limit mode.

thinlinelimit=off OFF Cancel the thin line limit mode.

Example: The command to set the thin line limit mode is

“lp –o thinlinelimit=on filename”.

— Do not Print Blank Pages

The Blank page mode can be selected using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

blankpage=0 Set the blank page mode (disable Do not Print Blank
Pages).

blankpage=1 Cancel the blank page mode (enable Do not Print Blank
Pages).

— Toner Save
The toner save mode can be set using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

tonersave=on ON Set the toner save mode.

tonersave=off OFF Cancel the toner save mode.

Example: The command to set the toner save mode is “lp –o tonersave=on filename”.

— Booklet Modes
The booklet mode can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

booklet=letter lt Select letter size paper for booklet printing mode.

LT

booklet=A4 a4 Select A4 size paper for booklet printing mode.

booklet=legal lg Select legal size paper for booklet printing mode.

LG

booklet= st Select statement size paper for booklet printing mode.

statement ST

304 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Option Value Alternate Value Description

booklet=ledger ld Select ledger size paper for booklet printing mode.

LD

booklet=folio folio-japan Select folio size paper for booklet printing mode.

booklet=A3 a3 Select A3 size paper for booklet printing mode.

booklet=A5 a5 Select A5 size paper for booklet printing mode.

booklet=B4 b4 Select JIS B4 size paper for booklet printing mode.

B4-JIS
b4-jis

booklet=B5 b5 Select JIS B5 size paper for booklet printing mode.

B5-JIS
b5-jis

booklet= co Select computer size paper for booklet printing mode.

computer CO

booklet=legal13 lg13 Select legal-13 size paper for booklet printing mode.
LG13

booklet=SQ85 sq85 Select 8.5 inch square size paper for booklet printing
letter-square mode.

booklet=8K 8k Select 8K size paper for booklet printing mode.

booklet=16K 16k Select 16K size paper for booklet printing mode.
In a job, if this value is LT, and in PDL too the data is for LT paper size, this will result in
a scaled booklet on Letter paper. In a job, if this value is A3, and in PDL the data is for
A4 paper size, this will result in a tiled booklet on A3 paper.
When the Booklet Mode options is selected, the paper size is automatically set to the
same size as for Booklet Mode. This function is only available for A3, A4, B4, Letter and
Ledger paper sizes.
If booklet mode is selected, then duplexing is also selected automatically (sduplex).
Setting duplexing separately can override the booklet mode setting for duplexing.
Example: The command to select the letter size paper for booklet printing mode is
“lp –o booklet=letter filename”.

— Page Layout
The booklet mode page layout can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

left2right=off OFF Select right to left page layout for booklet printing mode.
This value decides the layout of the pages in the book-
let.
If this value is OFF then the layout of pages is Right to
Left as shown in the figure below.

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 305

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Option Value Alternate Value Description

left2right=on ON Select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode.
This is the default setting.
If the value is ON then the layout of the pages is from
Left to Right as shown in the figure below.

If left2right=off then long edge binding is selected, otherwise if left2right=on then short
edge binding is used.
Example: The command to select left to right page layout for booklet printing mode is
“lp –o left2right=on filename”.

— Center Margin
The booklet mode center margin can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

centermargin Select the center margin value for booklet printing

=value mode.
This value specifies in pixels the Center Margin or the
“Gutter”. This is in addition to the center margin already
specified by the application. The valid range for value is
0 – 300. Default is 0.

Example: The command to select the center margin value for booklet printing mode is
“lp –o centremargin=value filename”.

— Outer Margin
The booklet mode outer margin can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

outermargin Select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode.
=value This value specifies in pixels the Outer Margin or the
“Creep” per page, which should take place while print-
ing a booklet. The valid range for value is 0 – 18.
Default is 0.

Example: The command to select the outer margin value for booklet printing mode is
“lp –o outermargin=value filename”.

— Collate
The collate option can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

collate=off OFF Cancel the collate printing mode.

collate=on ON Set the collate printing mode.

Example: The command to select collate off is “lp -o collate=off filename”.

306 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

— Orientation
The following orientation options are available.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

portrait Print the document in portrait orientation.

landscape Print the document in landscape orientation.

If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to specify landscape orientation is “lp –o landscape filename”.

— Font Pitch
If the pitch is specified the net_est451c program will always select the Courier font; oth-
erwise the default font is used. The following options are used to select the font pitch.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

c pitch=16.67 Set the character pitch to 16.67 characters per inch.

10 pitch=10 Set the character pitch to 10 characters per inch.

12 pitch=12 Set the character pitch to 12 characters per inch.

pitch=value Set the character pitch to value characters per inch.

In all the cases shown above the Courier font will also be selected. When the pitch is
changed the font size will automatically be scaled to the appropriate size.
If this option is not specified, the default pitch and font will be used.
Example: The command to specify 8 characters per inch is “lp –o pitch=8 filename”.

— Page Length
The number of lines to print on a page can be specified with the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

pl=value Set the lines per page to value.

As this equipment is a page printer we cannot change the physical length of a piece of
paper so the actual effect of this command is to change the value for lines per inch so
that the requested number of lines is printed on the page. The actual page length may
differ from this value if the top margin or the text length option is used.
If this option is not specified the PJL command will not be sent so the printer’s default
value will be used. The minimum page length allowable is 5. If value is less than 5 page
length is set to 5.
The command to specify 66 lines per page is “lp –o pl=66 filename”.

— Color Mode
The color mode print mode can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

colormode= color Set the color mode printing for the print mode.
COLOR

colormode= grayscale Set the grayscale mode printing for the print mode.
GRAYSCALE

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 307

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Example: The command to set the color mode for the print job is
“lp -o colormode=COLOR filename”

— Pure Black and Pure Gray

The pure black and pure gray mode can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

pureblackgray=0 Disable the pure black and pure gray mode.

pureblackgray=1 Enable the pure black and pure gray mode.

Example: The command to set the pure black and pure gray mode for the print job is
“lp -o pureblackgray=1 filename”

— Image Quality Type

The Image Quality Type can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

iqnormal Set the proper color quality for printing a general color
document.

iqphoto Set the proper color quality for printing photos.

iqpresen Set the proper image quality for printing a vivid docu-
ment.

iqlineart Set the proper image quality for printing a document

contains a lot of characters or line arts.

Example: The command to set the normal quality type for the print job is
“lp -o iqnormal filename”

— Halftone
The halftone can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

halftone=AUTO Set the proper halftone depending on the contents in

the document automatically. When this is selected, the
halftone is printed in detail for the texts, and smoothly
for the graphics.

halftone=DETAIL Set the halftone in detail.

halftone= Set the halftone smoothly.

SMOOTH

Example: The command to set the auto halftone for the print job is
“lp -o halftone=AUTO filename”

— Black Over Print

The black over print mode can be selected using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

blackoverprint=0 Disable the black over print mode.

blackoverprint=1 Enable the black over print mode.

308 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Example: The command to set the black over print mode for the print job is
“lp -o blackoverprint=1 filename”

PCL5e Specific Options

Some of the options only apply to plain text or PCL5e files.

— Text Wrapping
The following options control text wrapping when it reaches the right margin.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

wrap Enable automatic text wrapping.

nowrap Disable automatic text wrapping.

If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to specify wrapping is “lp –o wrap filename”.

— Left Margin
The left margin position can be specified with the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

lm=value Set the left margin to value columns.

If the left margin is set to the right of the right margin it will be ignored.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to set the left margin to five columns is “lp –o lm=5 filename”.

— Right Margin
The right margin position can be specified with the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

rm=value Set the right margin to value columns.

If the right margin is set to the left of the left margin or if it is set to a position wider than
the logical page it will be ignored. The right margin is specified in columns from the left
margin. A negative value will be ignored.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to set the right margin to fifty columns is
“lp –o rm=50 filename”.

— Top Margin
The top margin position can be specified with the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

tm=value Set the top margin to value lines.

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 309

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

If the top margin is set too high or too low part of the text may not appear due to the
printer’s unprintable region. The top margin will be ignored if it is set to a value greater
than the printer’s logical page length. Setting this value may affect the number of lines
specified using the page length option.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to set the top margin to ten lines is “lp –o tm=10 filename”.

— Text Length
The text length can be specified using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

tl=value Set the length to value lines.

If the text length is set too high, the part of the text may not appear due to the printer’s
unprintable area. The text length will be ignored if it is set to a value greater than the
printer’s logical page length minus the top margin. The text length is specified in rows
from the top margin. Setting this value may affect the number of lines specified using
the page length option.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used.
Example: The command to set the text length to 40 lines is “lp -o tl=40 filename”.

— Banner Page
A banner page is automatically generated for each file in each job. The banner page
contains the following items. The banner page is always sent as a PCL5e job.
• The name of the user that submitted the print job.
• The job ID number and from which workstation it was submitted.
• The title of the job. This title can be specified using the “-t” option. The same title is
used for every file within a job. The default title is controlled by the “lp” command.
• A list of the options that were specified to print the job.
• The number of copies of the job that will be printed.
• The name of the printer or its IP address.
• The date and time when the job was printed according to the print server.
• A short summary listing the available options.

Only one copy of the banner page is printed for each file, even if a number of copies of
the job are requested. The banner page is sent to the equipment as a separate sub-job
so that it is never stapled to the document.
The banner page is printed with the following settings.
• Copies = 1.
• Stapling off.
• Orientation = portrait.
• Duplex off.
• Paper size as requested by the “-o” parameter or the printer’s default value.
• The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different
values than the job’s paper source and media type.
• Auto paper source selection or the requested banner page source or media type.
• Output bin as requested by the “-o” parameter or the printer default value.
• 6 lines per inch
• Auto-wrap on.
• Automatic carriage-return when a line-feed is sent.

310 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

NOTES: • The banner page is designed to fit Statement / A5 and bigger paper. If the paper
selected is smaller, the banner page may wrap onto two (2) pages.
• The default is that the banner page is printed before the job so that it is in the correct
stacking order.
• When the language is set to “raw” the banner is always disabled.
• The paper source and the media type for the banner page can be set to different
values than the job’s paper source and media type. If a banner paper source is not
specified then the auto source command is sent. If a banner media type is not spec-
ified then no banner media type command is sent, so the printer’s default value will
be used.
• If the file being printed specifies the paper destination or the paper size internally the
banner page may print to the wrong output or on an incorrect paper size.

Banner Options
The banner page can be printed using the following options.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

banner=last Print the banner page after the job so that it will be
physically on top of the job in the output tray.

banner=first banner Print the banner page before the job so that it will be
physically under the job in the output tray.

nobanner nb Do not print a banner. The ability to specify the “noban-

ner” option can be disabled by the system administrator
to force all jobs to print with a banner.

The default value for this option is that the banner page prints first.

Banner Paper Source

The banner paper source can be specified using the following option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

bauto-source Select the auto paper tray selection.

bdrawer1 bupper Select the 1st drawer.

bcas1

bdrawer2 blower Select the 2nd drawer.

bcas2

bdrawer3 bpedupper Select the 3rd drawer.

bcas3

bdrawer4 bpedlower Select the 4th drawer.

bcas4

blcf BLCF Select the large capacity feeder. LCF is not available
for some countries or regions.

If the banner paper source is not specified the PCL5e auto paper source command
“<esc>&l7H” will be sent. The banner page source cannot be set to manual feed. The
paper size always has priority over the paper source.
Example: The command to specify that the banner page paper source is the LCF is
“lp –o blcf filename”.

Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX 311

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Banner Media Type

The banner page paper source can also be selected using the media type using the fol-
lowing option.

Option Value Alternate Value Description

bmtype=Plain1 The paper source that contains Plain1 paper is

requested.

bmtype= The paper source that contains transparency slides is

Transparency requested.

bmtype=Thick1 The paper source that contains Thick1 paper is

requested.

bmtype=Thick2 The paper source that contains Thich2 paper is

requested.

bmtype=Thick3 The paper source that contains Thich3 paper is

requested.

The paper size always has priority over the media type and the paper source.
If this option is not specified the command will not be sent so the printer’s default value
will be used to print the banner page.
The command to specify that the banner page should print on a colored media type is
“lp –o bmtype=Plain1 filename”.

312 Printing Guide — Printing from UNIX

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

Other Printing Methods

This equipment also supports following printing methods:
P.313 "FTP Printing"
P.314 "Email Printing"

NOTE: When the User Authentication is enabled on the equipment, the print jobs that are sent
by FTP printing and Email printing are proceed as invalid jobs according to the Depart-
ment Code Enforcement setting.

FTP Printing
FTP printing is available when the FTP print service is enabled on this equipment.
You can print a document by sending the print file to this equipment using the FTP. This
equipment can accept following files for printing:
• PCL file
• PS file
• Text file

SUPPLEMENTS: • In Windows, you can create the PCL file and PS file using the printer driver. To cre-
ate the PCL file or PS file, change the printer port of the printer driver to “FILE:” port
and print a document using the printer driver. For more information about printing to
a file, refer to the Windows documentation.
• In Macintosh, you can crate the PS file using the printer driver. To create the PS file,
select “File” at the “Destination” drop down box in the Print dialog box to print. For
more information about printing to a file, refer to the Macintosh documentation.

Printing a file using the FTP command

The procedure below describes the example of printing using the FTP command with
the MS-DOS Prompt.

1. Launch the MS-DOS Prompt.

2. Change the current directory to where the print file is
located.
3. Type following command and press the [Enter] key:
ftp <IP Address>

• In the <IP Address> section, enter the IP address of this equipment.

4. If it prompts you to enter the user name, enter the FTP Print
User Name and press the [Enter] key.
NOTE: It prompts you to enter the user name if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an
administrator. Ask your administrator for the FTP Print User Name.

5. If it prompts you to enter the password, enter the FTP Print

Password and press the [Enter] key.
NOTES: • It prompts you to enter the password if the FTP Print User Name is assigned by an
administrator. Ask your administrator for the FTP Print Password.
• If the FTP Print User Name has been assigned but the FTP Print Password blank,
do not enter when it prompts you to enter the password and press the [Enter] key.

Printing Guide — Other Printing Methods 313

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 3. Printing

6. Type the following command and press the [Enter] key:

put <file name>
For example of the print file name is “sample.ps”:
put sample.ps

7. The file is sent to this equipment and spooled in the queue.

Email Printing
Email printing is available when enabled on this equipment.
You can print a document by sending the print file, as an email attachment, to this
equipment using the mail client software. This equipment can accept only TIFF-S,
TIFF-F and TIFF-J files for printing:

NOTE: The Email print job is printed according to the RX Print settings, Discard Printing and
RX Reduction Printing, that can be set from the [RX PRINT] button in the [FAX] menu
on the Control Panel.
When Discard Printing is ON, the part of the print image that exceeds the paper printing
area is discarded if the print image is up to 10mm larger than the printing area. If the
print image is 10mm or more larger than the printing area, the print image is printed on
the largest paper.
When Discard Printing is OFF, the print image is printed on the largest paper if its length
exceeds the paper printing area.
When RX Reduction Printing is ON, it will be vertically reduced to fit on the paper if the
print image is longer than the paper. When the print image cannot fit in the paper even
if the print image is reduced, the print image is printed on the largest paper.
When RX Reduction Printing is OFF, the print image is printed on the largest paper if its
length exceeds the paper printing area.

Printing a file using the email client

The procedure below gives as example of printing using the Microsoft Outlook Express.

NOTE: When you send an email message to this equipment to print a file, send the message in
plain text format. If you send an email message in the HTML format, this equipment
prints the HTML source code of the message.

1. Open your email application and create new mail message.

2. Enter the email address of the equipment in the To: line.
3. Enter text in the Subject line or leave the Subject line blank.
4. Enter text in the body field.
5. Attach the file you want to print.
6. Send the email.
NOTE: The header and body of the email will be printed only when the “Print Header” and
“Print Message Body” for the Email print service is enabled on this equipment.

314 Printing Guide — Other Printing Methods

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

MONITORING PRINT JOBS

4.

This section describes how to monitor print jobs using TopAccessDocMon.

• Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon.........................................................................316

Printing Guide 315

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

TopAccessDocMon is a job monitoring tool that can remotely display and manage print
jobs on the queues of the equipment and other compatible TOSHIBA printer controllers
from the client computer.
TopAccessDocMon supports device and job monitoring the following TOSHIBA control-
lers:
• e-STUDIO451c Series
• e-STUDIO850 Series
• e-STUDIO4511 Series
• e-STUDIO450 Series
• e-STUDIO280 Series
• GL-1020
• GL-1010
• SC-2

SUPPLEMENT: TopAccessDocMon also can monitor the device status of the devices that support MIB-
II, Host Resource MIB, and Printer MIB.

NOTES: • To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon, the equipment and your com-
puter must be connected in the TCP/IP or IPX/SPX network.
• To monitor the print jobs using TopAccessDocMon, the SNMP Network Service
must be enabled using TopAccess. Information about setting up the SNMP Network
Service from the TopAccess is provided in the TopAccess Guide.
• TopAccessDocMon is only available for Windows. To monitor and manage print
jobs via a network environments, use TopAccess. Information about monitoring
print jobs from the TopAccess is provided in the TopAccess Guide.

Features and Functions

The document monitor, TopAccessDocMon, follows the progress of each job from your
computer desktop until it is printed on this equipment.
TopAccessDocMon consists of the document monitor and a printer status component.
• The document monitor provides event notification (alerts).
This means that if an event interrupts printing, such as a paper out condition, the
monitor displays an alert.
You can control which events cause TopAccessDocMon to display an alert.
• “Printer status” provides device-summary information and access to the print
queues (Print queue, Private Print queue, Proof Print queue, Scheduled Print
queue, Fax queue, e-Filing queue, and Invalid queue).

How to Use TopAccessDocMon

To monitor the print job using TopAccessDocMon, you must first activate it. Also you
can configured the settings how TopAccessDocMon works.
P.316 "Running TopAccessDocMon"
P.318 "Configuring TopAccessDocMon"

Running TopAccessDocMon
To access the TopAccessDocMon window, you must first activate it.
P.317 "Starting TopAccessDocMon"

Once you activate TopAccessDocMon, you can access the general functions from the
Document Monitor menu.
P.317 "Document Monitor Taskbar Menu"

316 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

— Starting TopAccessDocMon
First, load TopAccessDocMon so its icon appears on the Windows operating system
taskbar. You only need to do this once.

Starting TopAccessDocMon

1. Click the [Start] menu.

2. Select [TOSHIBA e-STUDIO Client] in the [Programs] menu,
and click [TopAccessDocMon].

• The TopAccessDocMon icon appears in the taskbar.

— Document Monitor Taskbar Menu

After TopAccessDocMon is activated, you can access its functions from the Document
Monitor menu (display from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the taskbar).

The following menus appears in the Document Monitor taskbar menu:

• Disable/Enable — This allows you to enable or disable document monitoring.
To turn on document monitoring, click [Enable] from the Document Monitor menu.
The option changes to Disable and displays the TopAccessDocMon icon on the
taskbar. Click [Disable] to terminate document monitoring.
• Configure — This allows you to configure how TopAccessDocMon monitors the
devices. When this is selected, the configuration dialog box appears.
P.318 "Configuring TopAccessDocMon"
• Exit — This allows you to exit TopAccessDocMon.
• TopAccessDocMon — This allows you to display the TopAccessDocMon window
for the default printer.
P.328 "TopAccessDocMon Window"
• TopAccess — This allows you to access TopAccess on the default printer. This is
available only when the default printer is set to either the e-STUDIO451c Series, e-
STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, e-STUDIO280
Series, GL-1020, or GL-1010.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 317

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

Configuring TopAccessDocMon
The configuration dialog box allows you to set startup options, select notification events
and methods, display or modify refresh rates, and manually update device discovery
settings.
In the configuration dialog box, the following tabs are displayed:
• Startup — This controls whether TopAccessDocMon is launched when starting
Windows.
P.318 "Configuring the Start Up Options"
• Notification — This controls which printing events cause a popup message or beep
alert.
P.319 "Configuring the Notifications"
• Refresh Rates — This controls how often the Document Monitor searches for event
notifications, printer status, and print queue contents in order to refresh the informa-
tion displayed. Refresh rates are also known as polling rates.
P.320 "Configuring the Refresh Rate"
• Installed — This shows the network address associated with each installed printer
driver.
P.321 "Finding the Printer Address"

Accessing configuration

To display the configuration dialog box, right-click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the
task bar and select [Configure] from the Document Monitor menu. You can also access
the configuration dialog box by double-clicking on the TopAccessDocMon icon in the
task bar.
To close the dialog box without changing settings, click [Cancel].

— Configuring the Start Up Options

In the Startup tab, you can set TopAccessDocMon to launch when starting Windows.

1) Run the document monitor when starting Windows

Check this to run TopAccessDocMon when starting Windows. When this is
checked, the TopAccessDocMon icon will automatically appear in the task bar every
time you start Windows.

318 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

— Configuring the Notifications

In the Notification tab, you can enable or disable the events notified by TopAccessDoc-
Mon.

1) Events
This sets the events which are notified. To enable or disable the notification of each
event, click the arrow button in the right. The events list is displayed, and you can
check on/off events that enable or disable notification.
- Document has been printed successfully — Check this to notify you when
the printer is finished printing the document.
- Private print document is being held — Check this to notify you when a pri-
vate print job that you have sent is ready for you to walk over to the printer and
release.
- Proof set has been printed — Check this to notify you when the printer has
printed the first copy of your multi-copy job, which is ready for your review before
releasing and printing the remaining copies.
- Fax has been transmitted successfully — Check this to notify you when the
printer has sent a fax when you have sent using the N/W-Fax driver. This is only
available when the Fax option is installed to the devices.
- Document has been cancelled by the printer — Check this to notify you when
the printer has cancelled the job. This can happen when a paper size is not
available and the timeout has expired. This event occurs only when cata-
strophic circumstances force the printer to cancel the job, such as a missing byte
or memory failure. Expired private print or proof print jobs are never cancelled
by the printer.
- Document cannot be printed due to error — Check this to notify you when the
printer is unable to print the job.
- Printer has a paper jam — Check this to notify you when there is a paper jam in
the printer.
- Fax transmission failure — Check this to notify you when the printer has failed
in sending a fax using the N/W-Fax driver. This message apply for e-
STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series only.
- Document is held as Invalid — Check this to notify you when a print job is held
as an invalid job because of the invalid department code or exceeding the limita-
tion for number of copies. This message apply for e-STUDIO451c Series, e-
STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-
STUDIO280 Series only.
- Printer is offline — Check this to notify you when the printer is off line. This is
only available for GL-1010, GL-1020, and SC-2.
- Drawer is out of paper — Check this to notify you when one of the printer draw-
ers is out of paper. This drawer may not be the drawer the printer is using for
your job.
- Printer door is open — Check this to notify you when the cover on the printer is
open.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 319

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

- Printer requires attention — Check this to notify you when the printer requires
immediate attention.
- Toner is Empty — Check this to notify you when a toner is empty.
- Used Toner Container is full — Check this to notify you when the used toner
container is full.
2) Method
This sets how TopAccessDocMon notifies you when events occur.
- Popup Dialog — Check this for a popup dialog box.
- Audio (Beep) — Check this for a beep sound.

— Configuring the Refresh Rate

The Refresh Rate tab lets you change the refresh rate for document notification, printer
status, and print queue.

2 3

1) Item/Refresh Rate
This list displays the refresh rate settings for each item. You can change the refresh
rate by selecting the item in this list and clicking [Change Rate...].
2) [Restore Defaults]
Click this to restore the default refresh rate for each item.
3) [Change Rate...]
Select an item in the list and click it to change the refresh rate. The Document Noti-
fication, Printer Status, and Print Queue dialog box appears.
P.320 "Changing the refresh rate"

Changing the refresh rate

The Document Notification, Printer Status, and Print Queue dialog box appears when
clicking [Change Rate...] in the Refresh Rate tab of the configuration dialog box.
When the dialog box appears, select the desired refresh rate using the slide bar. The
available range of the refresh rate varies for each item.

Document Notification
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 seconds. The
default refresh rate for the document notification is 30 seconds.

320 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

Printer Status
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 5 minute in units of 30 seconds. The
default refresh rate for the document notification is 1 minute.

Print Queue
You can set the refresh rate from 0 second to 1 minute in units of 10 seconds. The
default refresh rate for the document notification is 10 seconds.

— Finding the Printer Address

The Installed tab displays the network IP address of each device on your computer that
has a printer driver installed.
1 2 3

1) Printer Name
This displays the printer driver name.
2) Port
This displays the port on your computer to which the printer driver is connected.
3) IP/IPX Address
This displays the IP address or IPX address of the printer the printer driver maps.
4) [Update]
Click this to update the printer address information.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 321

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

Monitoring the Printer

This section describes how to monitor the printer using the TopAccessDocMon window.
P.322 "How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window"
P.328 "TopAccessDocMon Window"
P.339 "Event Notification"

How to Access the TopAccessDocMon Window

To display the TopAccessDocMon window that displays the print job information and
printer status, access either from the Document Monitor menu or Printers menu.

— Accessing from the Document Monitor Menu

You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the Document Monitor menu and
control it from the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.

Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Document Monitor menu

1. Right-click the TopAccessDocMon icon in the task bar.

2. In the menu displayed, select “TopAccessDocMon” to
access the TopAccessDocMon window.

• The TopAccessDocMon window appears.

NOTES: • TopAccessDocMon displays the TopAccessDocMon window for the printer set as a
default printer in the Printers folder. If the default printer is set to other than the
TOSHIBA printer driver, it displays the error message and the TopAccessDocMon
window cannot be displayed.
• If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver, a mes-
sage dialog box appears. In this case, click [Yes] to search for a printer and main-
tain the connection.
P.323 "Searching for a Printer"

— Accessing from the Printers File Menu

You can access the TopAccessDocMon window from the File menu of the Printers
folder. When you access TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu, the TopAc-
cessDocMon window for the selected printer.

Accessing TopAccessDocMon from the Printers File menu

1. Open the Printers folder and select the printer driver.

322 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

2. Click the [File] menu and select [TopAccessDocMon].

• The TopAccessDocMon window for the selected printer appears.

NOTE: If the connection to the printer is properly set in the selected printer driver, a message
dialog box appears. In this case, click [Yes] to search for a printer and maintain the
connection.
P.323 "Searching for a Printer"

— Searching for a Printer

When you activate TopAccessDocMon, if the printer driver you select is not connected
correctly to the printer, a message dialog box appears.
In this case, you can use the printer discovery functions to search the printer automati-
cally in the network, or enter the printer address manually.
P.323 "Finding a printer by searching automatically"
P.325 "Finding a printer by entering printer address manually"

Finding a printer by searching automatically

1. Click [Yes] in the message dialog box to find a printer.

• The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 323

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

2. Click [Start Discovery] to begin the process.

• TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network.

SUPPLEMENTS: • You can quit the process by clicking [Stop Discovery].

• It may not find the device that is located in the different segment. If a device cannot
be found, find a device manually from the [Manual Selection] button.
P.325 "Finding a printer by entering printer address manually"
• If the process continues for a long time, it is because too many network clients are in
the network. Also, you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a
printer in the IPX/SPX network. In these cases, please configure the discovery set-
tings using the [Advanced] button.
P.327 "Configuring Discovery Settings"

NOTE: When the equipment is connected to the IPX/SPX network of the NDS or NDPS envi-
ronment, the equipment cannot be discovered on Windows 98/Me. In this case, please
configure the connection manually.
P.325 "Finding a printer by entering printer address manually"

3. When the process is complete, the printers that have been

found are listed in the list.

324 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

4. Select the printers that you want to monitor from the list and
click [OK].

• TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and displays the TopAc-

cessDocMon window.

NOTE: If you select a different device from the default printer driver (when you run TopAccess-
DocMon by selecting [TopAccessDocMon] from the Document Monitor menu in the task
bar) or the selected printer driver (when you run TopAccessDocMon by selecting a
printer driver in the Printers folder and selecting [TopAccessDocMon] in the File menu),
the message “This printer is different from default printer. Continue to open TopAccess-
DocMon, please click ‘Yes’.” is displayed. If this message is displayed, click [No] and
select a correct device.

Finding a printer by entering printer address manually

1. Click [Yes] in the message dialog box to find a printer.

• The TopAccessDocMon Local Discovery dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 325

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

2. Click [Manual Selection].

• The Manual Selection dialog box appears.

3. Enter each item to specify the printer address and click [OK].

IP Address — Enter the IP address of the printer.

IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only
when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and
the computer is connected to the NetWare server.
Name — Enter the printer name.
Location — Enter the location of the printer.

NOTE: You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.

326 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

4. Entered printer is added in the list. Select a printer that you

want to monitor from the list and click [OK].

• TopAccessDocMon connects to selected printer and display the TopAccess-

DocMon window.

NOTE: If you select a different device from the default printer driver (when you run TopAccess-
DocMon by selecting [TopAccessDocMon] from the Document Monitor menu in the task
bar) or the selected printer driver (when you run TopAccessDocMon by selecting a
printer driver in the Printers folder and selecting [TopAccessDocMon] in the File menu),
the message “This printer is different from default printer. Continue to open TopAccess-
DocMon, please click ‘Yes’.” is displayed. If this message is displayed, click [No] and
select a correct device.

Configuring Discovery Settings

You can configure the discovery settings.

1) Devices
Click the arrow button to display the poll down list and check the model name that
you want to search.
2) Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX/SPX network. This is
available only when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your
computer, and the computer is connected to the NetWare server.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 327

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

3) Network - Enable TCP/IP Search

Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP/IP network. This is avail-
able only when the TCP/IP protocol is installed in your computer.
When this is enabled, select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in
the TCP/IP network.
- Search local subnet — Select this to search for printers in local subnet.
- Specify a range — Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IP
addresses. When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in “From” field and
“To” field to specify the range.

TopAccessDocMon Window
In the TopAccessDocMon window, you can monitor print jobs and printer status.

This window consists of:

• A menu bar containing the options Printer, Document, View, and Help. The Device
Status tab includes only the Printer, View and Help menus.
• There are nine (9) possible tabbed views: Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print,
Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, TopAccessComposer, and Invalid. The
tabs displayed vary depending on the printer being monitored.
• A status bar containing icons and text that allow you to quickly see the status of the
printer.

Menu Bar Options

The options are:
• Printer > Close — Closes the current window.
• Printer > Change Printer — The device names that have been added to the moni-
toring list are displayed. You can change the monitoring device by selecting the
device name.
P.331 "Changing Monitoring Devices"
• Document > Cancel — This menu is displayed under all queue tab. This item
allows you to delete the print job from the queue. You can only cancel print jobs that
you submitted.
• Document > Release Proof — This menu is displayed under the Proof Print tab.
This item displays the Release Proof dialog box where the number of copies to be
printed can be changed and the job released for printing (added to the current jobs
print queue). You can only release jobs that you submitted.
P.336 "Monitoring Queues"

328 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

• Document > Print Now — This menu is displayed under the Scheduled Print tab.
This item overrides the assigned print schedule order for a particular job and prints
the selected job immediately.
P.336 "Monitoring Queues"
• Document > Release — This menu is displayed under the Invalid tab. This item
displays the Invalid Release dialog box where the department code is entered and
the job is released for printing.
• View > Configure — Displays the Configuration window.
P.318 "Configuring TopAccessDocMon"
• View > Refresh — Renews the window display.
• View > Status Bar — Check or uncheck to display or hide the status bar.
• Help > Contents and Index — Accesses the online help application.
• Help > About TopAccessDocMon — Displays copyright, version, and other infor-
mation about the Document Monitor.

Document Monitoring Tabs

The tabs on this window vary depending on the monitoring device:
e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450
Series, or e-STUDIO280 Series — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof
Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, e-Filing, and Invalid
GL-1020 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print,
Fax, TopAccessComposer, and Invalid
GL-1010 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print,
Fax, TopAccessComposer, and Invalid
SC-2 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, and Proof Print.
Other devices (that supports MIB-II, Host Resource MIB, and Printer MIB) — Device
Status
• Device Status tab — Displays the printer information.
• Print Queue tab — Displays a list of all current jobs. Using this tab you can display
all the jobs in the print queue, pause and resume printing, and cancel a print job.
• Private Print tab — Lists the confidential print jobs. Using this tab you can display
all your private print jobs and cancel jobs as needed.
• Proof Print tab — Displays details of proof print jobs. Proof print jobs are those for
which a proof copy has already been printed but the balance remaining is being
held in this queue. You can display all proof print jobs that have not been printed,
release the rest of the document for printing, and cancel a print job — as needed.
• Scheduled Print tab — Displays details of jobs that are being held for printing at a
specified date and time.
• Fax tab — Displays details of fax jobs that are being sent using the N/W-Fax driver.
• e-Filing tab — Displays details of documents that are being stored in Box about
one minute.
• TopAccessComposer tab — Displays details of documents that are being stored
in TopAccessComposer about one minute.
• Invalid tab — Lists jobs with invalid department codes and jobs exceed the limita-
tion for number of copies.

Status Bar
The status bar extends along the lower border of the TopAccessDocMon window. The
information it contains depends upon the tab you’ve chosen.

SUPPLEMENT: You can choose whether or not to display the status bar by checking/unchecking the
Status Bar option using the View menu.

1) Status
Located on the left side of the bar, is a phrase that describes the status of the device
or job:

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 329

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

- Device Status tab — shows the condition of the printer.

- Print Queue tab — shows the number of documents in the print queue.
- Private Print tab — shows the number of private print jobs.
- Proof Print tab — shows the number of proof print jobs.
- Scheduled Print tab — shows the order of scheduled print jobs for the selected
device.
- Fax tab — shows the number of fax jobs.
- e-Filing tab — shows the number of print jobs to be sent to Box.
- TopAccessComposer tab — shows the number of print jobs to be sent to TopAc-
cessComposer.
- Invalid — shows the number of print jobs in the Invalid print queue.
2) IP/IPX Address
This item on the taskbar shows the IP address or IPX address for the device con-
nected to the selected printer.
3) Connection Status
The icon shows the communication status of the printer.
Shows that TopAccessDocMon is communicating with the printer.

Shows that the communications link between TopAccessDocMon and

the printer is broken and displays the message The printer is not
responding.

TopAccessDocMon periodically tries to reestablish the link. How frequently this is

done depends upon the refresh rate.
Warnings display in yellow and errors in red. Clicking the primary icon (the first one)
takes you to the TopAccessDocMon window.
4) Printer Icon
Click the printer icon to update the information.

— Checking Device Status

In the Device Status tab, you can check the printer status.

8
1

2
9
3
4
5
6
7 10

The printer information includes:

330 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

1) Printer Image
This displays a visual representation of the printer, showing the device status icon
when an error condition occurs.
P.355 "Device Status Indicators"
2) Name
This displays the name of the printer.
3) Model
This displays the printer model name.
4) Location
This displays the printer’s physical location.
5) Status
This tells you if the machine is ready for printing.
6) Hole Punch
This displays the type of hole punch unit installed.
7) Physical Address
This displays the printer’s machine address (a unique ID provided by the printer’s
network card, also referred to as the hardware address.)
8) Printer Information
This displays the drawer status icon along with the errors and warnings that have
been recorded for the printer. Shows drawer status and provides machine informa-
tion such as toner low, door open, paper jam, etc. Also it provides the alert and
counter information.
9) Description (list box below Printer Information)
This highlights the method of recovery for the alert selected above.
10) [Add Device]
Click this to add a new device to be monitored. The TopAccessDocMon Network
Discovery dialog box appears.
P.331 "Adding Devices"

— Changing Monitoring Devices

You can change the device to display the details in the TopAccessDocMon window.
To change the device, click the [Printer] menu, [Change Printer], and select the device
name of which the details are displayed in the TopAccessDocMon window.

SUPPLEMENT: You can add the device name in the Change Printer menu by clicking [Add Device] in
the Device Status tab.
P.331 "Adding Devices"

— Adding Devices
You can add the devices to be monitored by TopAccessDocMon.
To add the new device, you can use the TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery func-
tion. You can add the printer by automatically searching the printer in your network, or
entering the printer address manually.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 331

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

Adding new device by searching the printer automatically

1. Click [Add Device] in the Device Status tab.

• The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears.

2. Click [Start Discovery] to begin the process.

• TopAccessDocMon locates the compatible printers in your network.

SUPPLEMENTS: • You can quit the process by clicking [Stop Discovery].

• It may not find the device that is located in the different segment. If a device cannot
be found, find a device manually from the [Manual Selection] button.
P.333 "Adding new device by entering the printer address manually"

3. When the process is complete, the printers that have been

found are listed in the “Discovered Device” list.
SUPPLEMENT: If the process continues for a long time, it is because too many network clients are on
the network. Also, you must change the discover settings if you want to search for a
printer in the IPX/SPX network. In this case, you can configure the discovery settings
using the [Advanced] button.
P.335 "Configuring Network Discovery Settings"

332 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

4. Select the printers that you want to monitor from the “Dis-
covered Device” list and click [Add].

• The selected printer is added to the “Monitoring Device” list.

SUPPLEMENT: You can remove the printers from the “Monitoring Device” list. To do this, select the
printer that you want to remove and click [Remove]. However, you cannot remove the
printers which are related to the installed printer drivers.

5. Click [OK].

Adding new device by entering the printer address manually

1. Click [Add Device] in the Device Status tab.

• The TopAccessDocMon Network Discovery dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 333

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

2. Click [Manual Selection].

• The Manual Selection dialog box appears.

3. Enter each item to specify the printer address.

IP Address — Enter the IP address of the printer.

IPX Address — Enter the IPX address of the printer. This is available only
when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your computer, and
the computer is connected to the NetWare server.
Name — Enter the printer name.
Location — Enter the location of the printer.

NOTE: You must enter “Name” and either “IP Address” or “IPX Address”.

334 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

4. Entered printer is added in the “Monitoring Device” list.

Click [OK].

Configuring Network Discovery Settings

You can configure the discovery settings for the Network Discovery in the Discovery
Settings dialog box.

1) Devices - Find TOSHIBA Devices

Check on this to search only for TOSHIBA devices in your network, such as the e-
STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450
Series, e-STUDIO280 Series, GL-1020, GL-1010 and SC-2.
2) Devices - Find All Devices on the Network
Check on this to search for all compatible devices can be detected.
3) Network - Enable IPX/SPX Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the IPX/SPX network. This is
available only when the IPX/SPX protocol and Novell Client are installed in your
computer, and the computer is connected to the NetWare server.
4) Network - Enable TCP/IP Search
Check on this to search for printers connected to the TCP/IP network. This is avail-
able only when the TCP/IP protocol is installed in your computer.
When this is enabled, select how TopAccessDocMon should search for printers in
the TCP/IP network.
- Search local subnet — Select this to search for printers in local subnet.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 335

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

- Specify a range — Select this to search for printers in a specific range of IP

addresses. When this is selected, enter the IP addresses in the “From” field and
“To” field to specify the range.

— Monitoring Queues
Each of the TopAccessDocMon job status tabs display essentially the same informa-
tion.

The Queue tabs on the TopAccessDocMon window are vary depending on the monitor-
ing device:
e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO850 Series, e-STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450
Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled
Print, Fax, e-Filing, and Invalid
GL-1020 — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAccess-
Composer, and Invalid
GL-1010 — Print Queue, Private Print, Proof Print, Scheduled Print, Fax, TopAccess-
Composer, and Invalid
SC-2 — Device Status, Print Queue, Private Print, and Proof Print.

Job status information

• Document Name — is the name of the document that is printing.
• Status — is the state or condition of the job.
• Scheduled — for Scheduled Print jobs, this item displays the date and time the job
is scheduled to print in localized form.
• User Name — identifies who submitted the job.
• Pages — shows the pages in the job and number of pages printed.
• Submitted — is the date and time that the print job was submitted.
• Copies — this item contains the number of copies requested.

In each queue tab, you can delete a print job that you originally submitted.
In addition, in the Proof Print tab, you can print the remaining copies of proof print jobs.
In the Scheduled Print tab, you can print the selected scheduled job immediately. In the
Invalid tab, you can print the selected job by entering the department code.

Deleting print jobs

1. Display the queue tab and select a print job that you want to
delete.
NOTE: You can delete the print job only that you originally submitted.

336 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

2. Click [Document] menu and select [Cancel].

• The selected job is deleted.

Releasing proof print documents

1. Display the Proof Print tab and select a proof print job that
you want to print of remaining copies.
NOTE: You can release the proof print job only that you originally submitted.

2. Click [Document] menu and select [Release Proof].

• The Release Proof dialog box appears.

3. Enter the number of copies and click [OK].

• The remaining copies of the proof print job are printed.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 337

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

Releasing scheduled print documents immediately

1. Display the Scheduled Print tab and select a scheduled print

job that you want to print immediately.
NOTE: You can release the scheduled print job only that you originally submitted.

2. Click [Document] menu and select [Print Now].

• The selected scheduled print job is immediately printed.

Releasing invalid print documents

1. Display the Invalid Print tab and select a print job that you
want to print.
NOTES: • You can release the print job only that you originally submitted.
• The invalid jobs for exceeding the limitation for number of copies cannot be
released.

338 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

2. Click [Document] menu and select [Release].

• The Invalid Release dialog box appears.

3. Enter the 5-digit department code and click [OK].

• The selected invalid print job is printed.

Event Notification
When an event occurs that has been assigned alert status (selected for notification), a
popup notification dialog box appears. This popup message contains the following infor-
mation about the event:

NOTE: If you did not select Popup Message as the notification method, you will not see a
popup notification dialog box.

• Date/Time — displays the date and time of the document.

• Document — displays the name of the document.
• Message — displays the event notification message.
• Notification Number — displays the sequential order of the current message in the
notification queue. For example, 3/8 indicates that it is the third message in a queue
of eight notifications.
• — Click this to display the first notification dialog box in the queue.
• — Click this to display the previous notification dialog box in the queue.

Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon 339

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 4. Monitoring Print Jobs

• — Click this to display the next notification dialog box in the queue.
• — Click this to display the last notification dialog box in the queue.
• Close — closes the window.

340 Printing Guide — Monitoring Print Jobs with TopAccessDocMon

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

TROUBLESHOOTING
5.

This section describes about troubleshooting for printing features.

• When Printing cannot be Performed...........................................................................................342
• Printer Driver Errors .....................................................................................................................343
• TopAccessDocMon Errors ...........................................................................................................347

Printing Guide 341

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

When Printing cannot be Performed

NOTE: This problem can arise as the result of a hardware malfunction, a network communica-
tion or configuration problem. Before troubleshooting the client error, ask your adminis-
trator to troubleshoot the hardware or network errors. Those troubleshooting are
described in the Network Administration Guide.

The following checklist helps you identify the source of the error and directs to you
where you can find more information about resolving it.

Client Error for Windows Platform

No Check... Yes No For Instruction, Go To...

1 Have you ever printed success- Next P.344 "Driver Mapped to

fully from this client workstation? Step Ö Wrong Port"
Ø

2 Do you set up the printer driver Next P.345 "Cannot Print a

other than a SMB connection? Step Ö Job Using SMB"
Ø

3 Open TopAccessDocMon and P.347 "The Device is Not

note the taskbar connection icon Next Responding"
Step Ö
and status bar message. Is this Ø
equipment responding?

4 Try resubmitting the job. Does P.348 "Cannot Interpret

the printer status read “Docu- End Ö TopAccessDocMon Mes-
ment has printed successfully”? sages/Warning/Errors"

Client Error for Macintosh Platform

No Check... Yes No For Instruction, Go To...

1 Is this equipment you created P.150 "Installing the

End Ö
selected in the Chooser? Printer on Mac OS 8.6/9.x"

Print Job Status Messages

The status and result of the print jobs is indicated as following in the Print Job page in
the Job Status tab and Print Log page in the Logs tab.

Error Code Cause Corrective Action

PM size error 1200 dpi print jobs cannot be printed without

402F the optional expansion memory. Send a print
job with a 600 dpi setting.

HDD full error Delete unnecessary private print jobs and

4031
invalid department print jobs.

A221 Job canceled (Job was canceled.)

Power failure Check if the power cable is connected properly

A222 and it is inserted securely. Check if the power
voltage is unstable.

342 Printing Guide — When Printing cannot be Performed

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Printer Driver Errors

Printer Driver Installation Error Messages

Setup Needs to Copy Windows NT Files

Problem Description
The wrong port type was selected from the Printer Ports dialog.

Corrective Action
1. Click Cancel until the Add Printer Wizard terminates.
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder but, when prompted to select a
port, choose Local Port.

Client Software CD Now Required

Problem Description
When adding a new printer driver, the end user did not choose the Have Disk option;
instead, he selected the printer name from the Add Printer list.

Corrective Action
1. Cancel the Add Printer Wizard.
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder but, when prompted to locate the
driver, click Have Disk.
3. Select Use Existing Driver to add another copy of an existing driver or browse to the
subdirectory that contains the appropriate *.inf file.

File *.DRV on Client CD Count Not Be Found

Problem Description
When adding a new printer driver, the user did not choose the Have Disk option but
selected the printer name from the Add Printer list.

Corrective Action
1. Cancel the Add Printer Wizard.
2. Double-click Add Printer from the Printers folder, but when prompted to locate the
driver, click Have Disk.
3. Browse to the subdirectory that contains the appropriate *.inf file.

Location Does Not Contain Information About Your

Hardware
Problem Description
The path to the *.inf file selected during driver installation is too far away. In other words,
there are too many characters in the directory path.

Corrective Action
Copy the directory containing the *.inf file to the local drive and resume installation.

Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors 343

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

This Port is Currently in Use

Problem Description
The driver was either open, printing a job, or is in use by another printer or application,
when you attempted to delete it.

Corrective Action
Make sure all print jobs have completed before deleting a port. If there are still prob-
lems, exit all applications and try again. Check each driver to see if another driver is
using the same port. If so, first change the driver’s port setting and delete the port.

Problem with the Current Printer Setup

Problem Description
The driver was not set up properly, possibly because the installation procedure did not
complete.

Corrective Action
Delete the driver and either reinstall it from the distribution CD-ROM or download it from
this equipment.

Printer Driver General Errors

Driver Mapped to Wrong Port

Problem Description
If the printer driver on a client workstation points to the wrong network port, jobs do not
appear in the current jobs queue or print out.

Corrective Action
1. Open the Printers folder from the Control Panel.
2. Right-click the printer driver icon.
3. Select Properties from the shortcut menu.
4. Depending on the operating system, select the following tab:
- In Windows 98/Me — Select Details. Browse to select the printer or Novell
queue.
- In Windows NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003 — Select Ports. Add a new port and
map it to the printer.
5. Make sure that the path to the printer and the device name are correct.
\\<device name>\print
- Where <device name> is the same as the device name set from the Touch
Panel Display.
6. Click the General Tab and click Print Test Page to confirm that the settings are cor-
rect.

344 Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Command Line Options Not Processed

Problem Description
All print options are sent to this equipment at the start of the print job. If the print file
already contains print commands, they override the command line options you set. For
example, if the print file specifies the Letter media, and you specify the A4 media option
with the lp command, the document is output on letter size paper (provided, of course,
that all copier-related restrictions have been met).

Corrective Action
Change the properties in the document you want to print and recreate the print file.
Submit the print job using the LP command without setting additional parameters.

Cannot Remember Document Password

Problem Description
There is no way to obtain the password for a Private Print job after it has been sent. A
private print job remains in the queue until the correct Document Password is entered.

Corrective Action
The end user must delete the job from the Touch Panel Display or through TopAccess-
DocMon and resubmit the Private Print job using a new password. Encourage the user
to write down the password so they can enter it to retrieve their jobs from the Touch
Panel Display.

Retrieval of Printer Configuration Failed

Problem Description
When accessing the printer properties, the system displayed “Retrieval of printer con-
figuration failed”.

Corrective Action
If the printer driver cannot communicate with this equipment — Verify that the system is
running. If not, turn it on. Connect to this equipment via TopAccess. If you cannot con-
nect, reboot this equipment. If that fails, check the printer driver port assignment to
make sure it is correct.

Cannot Print a Job Using SMB

Problem Description
When printing a document using a SMB connection, the job cannot be printed because
an error such as “No more connections can be made to this remote computer” and
“Your file could not be printed due to an error” are continuously displayed.

Corrective Action
It assumes using SMB printing in a small network. If you can use the Windows NT 4.0,
Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows Server 2003 as a print server, it is recom-
mended to set up for printing via Windows print server. For further information about
setting up printing via a Windows print server, see the Network Administration Guide.
If you cannot use a Windows print server in your network, use LPR printing for Windows
NT 4.0/2000/XP/Server 2003.

Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors 345

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Cannot Print a Job as Expected Using PS Printer Driver

Problem Description
When printing with the PS3 printer driver from the application that creates the Post-
Script code for printing such as Adobe Acrobat, the following print options may not work
correctly.
• Manual Scale
• Print Paper Size
• Paper Type
• User Front Cover
• User Back Cover
• Interleave Pages
• Insert Pages
• Booklet
• Multiple Pages per Sheet
• All options in the Effect tab
• All options in the Image Quality tab

Corrective Action
Disable “Use PostScript Passthrough” in the PostScript Settings dialog box and print a
document.

Cannot Change Settings on Font Tab and Configuration Tab

Problem Description
The Font tab and Configuration tab are grayed out and they cannot be modified.

Corrective Action
Users who do not have the privilege to change the printer driver setting cannot change
the options in the Font tab and Configuration tab. Please log in with Administrator or
Power User.

346 Printing Guide — Printer Driver Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

TopAccessDocMon Errors
This section describes about the error conditions and messages of TopAccessDocMon.
P.347 "TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions"
P.348 "TopAccessDocMon Error Messages"
P.355 "Device Status Indicators"

TopAccessDocMon Error Conditions

Refer to the corrective action for the following error conditions.
P.347 "The Device is Not Responding"
P.347 "Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue"
P.348 "Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/Warning/Errors"

The Device is Not Responding

Problem Description
The status bar reads, “The device is not responding” and the broken connection icon is
displayed in the taskbar.
Technically, this icon means that the SNMP manager on the client machine cannot com-
municate with the SNMP agent on this equipment. Several error conditions can cause
this status:
• The network connection between the client and the device has been broken.
• The device IP Address has changed and the client is still using the old address.
• The device is currently rebooting.
• The SNMP agent on the device is not functioning properly or has stopped function-
ing.

Corrective Action
1. Make sure that the SNMP Network Service is enabled from the Network Setup page
in the TopAccess Administrator mode.
2. Wait for a couple of minutes. Most of the time, the connection is reestablished auto-
matically.
3. If the broken connection condition persists, exit and restart TopAccessDocMon.
4. If, upon restarting TopAccessDocMon, you receive a message that the address can-
not be resolved, manually discover and select the device.
P.323 "Searching for a Printer"

Cannot View Job in TopAccessDocMon Print Queue

Problem Description
After submitting a job to print, there are several reasons why you may not see the job in
the print queue:
• The wrong device selected.
• The job is queued on the Windows operating system print spooler.
• The job may be held in the Novell print queue.
• A copier error prevents printing.

Corrective Action
• Check the device location to see if there really should be any jobs listed.
• Check the Jobs Log in TopAccess to see if the status of the job is listed as Done,
Deleted, or Unserviceable.
• If the job is very small, it may have already been serviced and moved to the Jobs
Log as a terminated job. If the job was unserviceable for some reason, it no longer
appears in the under Current Jobs list.

Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors 347

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

• Look at the Touch Panel Display for error messages. For instance, a prompt to load
paper holds up subsequent jobs in the queue.
• In a Peer to Peer environment, the job may be queued on the Microsoft Windows
operating system print spooler and, consequently, not available in Current Jobs or
the Jobs Log. If you do not see any error messages and the printer seems to be
working fine, resubmit the job.
• The job may be in the Novell print queue and thus, not visible for the moment. Use
NWAdmin or PCONSOLE to see if there are any queue errors.

Cannot Interpret TopAccessDocMon Messages/

Warning/Errors
Problem Description
The device status indicates the current state of the copier to which print jobs are being
submitted.

Corrective Action
For an explanation of device status messages, refer to the following section.
P.348 "TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages"
P.350 "TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages"

TopAccessDocMon Error Messages

When the error message or printer status message is displayed, refer to the following
section to find your corrective action.
P.348 "TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages"
P.350 "TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages"

TopAccessDocMon Notification Messages

The following table shows the notification messages displayed and helps you to find
more information about resolving it.

Message Description

Your document has been User has sent a print job and it has finished printing success-
printed. fully.

Your private print document is User has sent a private print job and it is ready for the user to
now being held. walk to copier and activate the job.

Your proof set has been User has sent a private print job and a proof copy of a multi-
printed. copy job has printed, and it is ready for the user to review
before releasing and printing the remaining copies.

Your fax has been transmit- User has sent a fax job and it has finished faxing successfully.
ted successfully.

348 Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Message Description

Your document has been User had sent a print job and it has been changed to a can-
cancelled. celled state. This can happen when a paper size is not avail-
able and the timeout has expired. Ensure proper paper has
been set to this equipment and resubmit the job.
If this message is notified after sending a private, proof, or
scheduled print job, the private or proof print job was cancelled
before it was put into a held state. This may occur because of
a missing byte or memory failure. In this case, ask your admin-
istrator to maintain the available hard disk space to store the
jobs, or delete the unnecessary jobs stored and resubmit the
job.

Your document cannot be User has sent a print job and it was rendered unserviceable by
printed due to error. this equipment. Make sure you use the correct printer driver.

Fax transmission failure The the transmission of a fax job that was sent using N/W-Fax
driver failed. Make sure you specify the correct destinations.

Document is held as invalid The print job is held as an invalid job because of an invalid
department code. Make sure you specify the correct depart-
ment code.

The printer has a paper jam. A paper jam has occurred. Remove the jam and resubmit the
job.

The printer is offline. The printer is offline. This may be displayed by monitoring
other TOSHIBA device, such as GL-1020, GL-1010, SC-2, so
on. Turn the printer online and resubmit the job.

The printer is out of paper. One of the drawers is out of paper. Add paper.

The printer door is open. One of the doors is opened. Close the door.

The printer requires attention. An error has occurred. Go to the Touch Panel Display to see
the type of error. For more details on resolving the error, refer
to the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function or consult your
network administrator.

The yellow toner is Empty. One of the toner cartridges is empty. Replace it.
The magenta toner is Empty. Toner Empty message for yellow, magenta, cyan toners are
The cyan toner is Empty. displayed only for e-STUDIO4511 Series.
The black toner is Empty.

The used toner container is The toner bag is full. Replace the toner bag.
full.

Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors 349

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

TopAccessDocMon Printer Status Messages

The following table shows the printer status messages displayed in the Device Status
tab and helps you to find more information about resolving it.

Status Details Description

Paper Empty Paper Empty in Upper Add paper in the Drawer 1.

Drawer - Please Add Paper.

Paper Empty in Drawer 1 -

Please Add Paper

Paper Empty in Lower Add paper in the Drawer 2.

Drawer - Please Add Paper.

Paper Empty in Drawer 2 -

Please Add Paper

Paper Empty in Pedestal Add paper in the Drawer 3.

Upper Drawer - Please Add
Paper.

Paper Empty in Drawer 3 -

Please Add Paper

Paper Empty in Pedestal Add paper in the Drawer 4.

Lower Drawer - Please Add
Paper.

Paper Empty in Drawer 4 -

Please Add Paper

Paper Empty in Large Capac- Add paper in the Large Capacity Feeder.
ity Feeder - Please Add
Paper.

Paper Empty in Stack Feed Add paper in the Stack Feed Bypass.
Bypass - Please Add Paper.

350 Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Status Details Description

Cover Open Platen Cover Open - Please Close the Platen Cover.
Close Cover

Front Cover Open - Please Close the Front Cover.

Close Cover.

Main Feeding Cover Open - Close the Main Part Feeding Cover.
Please Close Cover.

Transfer Cover Open - Close the Transfer Cover.

Please Close Cover.

Lower Side Cover Open - Close the Large Capacity Feeder Feeding
Please Close Cover. Cover.

Drawer Open - Please Close Close the Drawer Cover.

Cover.

Auto Duplex Unit Cover Open Close the duplex unit cover.
- Please Close Cover.

Relay Unit Cover Open - Close the Relay Unit Cover.

Please Close Cover.

Finisher Door Open - Please Close the Finisher Door.

Close Door.

Lower Tray Transport Cover Close the Lower Tray Transport Cover.
Open - Please Close Cover.

Lower Tray Delivery Cover Close the Lower Tray Delivery Cover.
Open - Please Close Cover.

Lower Tray Front Cover Open Close the Lower Tray Front Cover.
- Please Close Cover.

Hole Punch Unit Front Cover Close the Punch Unit Front Cover.
Open - Please Close Cover.

Hole Punch Unit Cover Open Close the Punch Unit Cover.
- Please Close Cover.

Inserter Unit Cover Open - Close the Inserter Unit Cover.

Please Close Cover

Exit Cover Open - Please Close the Exit Cover.

Close Cover

Job Separator Cover Open - Close the Job Separator Cover.

Please Close Cover. This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Offset Tray Cover Open - Close the Offset Tray Cover.

Please Close Cover. This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors 351

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Status Details Description

Paper Jam Paper Jam in Auto Duplex Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Unit - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.
Path

Paper Jam in Stack Feed Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Bypass - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.
Path

Paper Jam in Upper Drawer - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.

Paper Jam in Drawer 1 -

Please Clear Paper Path

Paper Jam in Lower Drawer - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.

Paper Jam in Drawer 2 -

Please Clear Paper Path

Paper Jam in Large Capacity Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Feeder - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.
Path

Paper Jam in Pedestal Upper Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Drawer - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.
Path

Paper Jam in Drawer 3 -

Please Clear Paper Path

Paper Jam in Pedestal Lower Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Drawer - Please Clear Paper to remove jammed paper.
Path

Paper Jam in Drawer 4 -

Please Clear Paper Path

Paper Jam in Finisher - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.

Paper Jam in Printer - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.

Paper Jam in Job Separator - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Clear Paper Path. to remove jammed paper.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Paper Jam in Offset Tray - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Clear Paper Path. to remove jammed paper.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Paper Ejection Jam - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.

Paper Insertion Jam - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Clear Paper Path to remove jammed paper.

Paper Jam in Auto Docu- Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
ment Feeder - Please Clear to remove jammed paper.
Paper Path

352 Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Status Details Description

Toner Full Used Toner Container Full - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Replace. to replace the Toner Container.

Toner Empty Black Toner Empty - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Refill. to replace the Black Toner.

Cyan Toner Empty - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Refill. to replace the Cyan Toner.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO451c
Series.

Magenta Toner Empty - Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Please Refill. to replace the Magenta Toner.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO451c
Series.

Yellow Toner Empty - Please Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Refill. to replace the Yellow Toner.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO451c
Series.

Toner Near Black Toner Cartridge Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Empty Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Black Toner.
Cartridge Before System is
Empty.

Cyan Toner Cartridge Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Cyan Toner.
Cartridge Before System is This error message is only displayed for e-
Empty. STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO451c
Series.

Magenta Toner Cartridge Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Magenta Toner.
Cartridge Before System is This error message is only displayed for e-
Empty. STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO451c
Series.

Yellow Toner Cartridge Refer to the HELP on the Touch Panel Display
Depleted - Please Install New to replace the Yellow Toner.
Cartridge Before System is This error message is only displayed for e-
Empty. STUDIO4511 Series and e-STUDIO451c
Series.

Staple Empty Staple Empty - Please Set Set the Staple Cartridge. Refer to the Opera-
Staple Cartridge tor’s Manual for Basic Function for instruc-
tion.

Finisher’s Lower Tray Staples Set the Saddle Staple Cartridge. Refer to the
are Empty - Please Replace Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for
Saddle Staple Cartridge instruction.

Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors 353

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Status Details Description

Printer Error Finisher Disconnected - Join the Finisher to the copier stably.
Please Join Finisher to
Copier.

Hole Punch Jam in Finisher - Clear hole punches from the Finisher. Refer to
Please Clear Hole Punch the Operator’s Manual for Basic Function
for instruction.

Staple Jam in Finisher - Remove jammed staples from the Finisher.

Please Clear Staple Refer to the Operator’s Manual for Basic
Function for instruction.

Staple Jam in Lower Tray of Remove jammed staples from the Saddle-
Finisher - Please Clear Staple stitch Finisher. Refer to the Operator’s Man-
ual for Basic Function for instruction.

Toner Error - Please Use Check and adjust the toner bottle.
Genuine TOSHIBA Toner.

Finisher Lower Tray Full - Remove paper from the Lower Tray of Saddle-
Please Remove Paper stitch Finisher.

Mixed Sized Paper not Check the paper.

Allowed - Please Check
Paper

Finisher Tray 1 Paper Full - Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 1.
Please Remove Paper.

Finisher Tray 2 Paper Full - Remove paper from the Finisher Tray 2.
Please Remove Paper.

Inner Tray Paper Full - Remove paper from the Inner Tray.
Please Remove Paper. This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO4511 Series, e-STUDIO450 Series,
and e-STUDIO280 Series.

Hole Punch Full in Finisher- Dispose the punched paper bits. Refer to the
Please Clear Hole Punch. Operator’s Manual for Basic Function for
instruction.

Job Separator Upper Paper Remove paper form the Job Separator Upper
Full - Please Remove Paper. Tray.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Job Separator Lower Paper Remove paper from the Job Separator Lower
Full - Please Remove Paper. Tray.
This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Offset Tray Full - Please Remove paper from the Offset Tray.
Remove Paper. This error message is only displayed for e-
STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280
Series.

Printer Output Error - Please Contact your service representative.

Contact Service Technician.

Printer Input Error - Please Contact your service representative.

Contact Service Technician.

354 Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

Status Details Description

Contact Ser- Auto Document Feeder Error Contact your service representative.
vice Techni- - Please Contact Service
cian Technician.

Alignment Error in Auto Docu- Contact your service representative.

ment Feeder - Please Con-
tact Service Technician.

Motor Error in Auto Document Contact your service representative.

Feeder - Please Contact Ser-
vice Technician.

I/F Error in Auto Document Contact your service representative.

Feeder - Please Contact Ser-
vice Technician.

Fatal Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.

Service Technician.

Main Motor Error - Please Contact your service representative.

Contact Service Technician.

Fuser Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.

Service Technician.

Scanner Error - Please Con- Contact your service representative.

tact Service Technician.

Motor Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.

Service Technician.

HDD Error - Please Contact Contact your service representative.

Service Technician.

The Time for Periodic Mainte- Contact your service representative.

nance - Please Contact Ser-
vice Technician.

Device Status Indicators

The Printer Image area for the TopAccessDocMon Device tab window displays visual
Device Status Indicators in the event of a device malfunction.
• Printer Error 1

The above printer error icon indicate that non-recommended toner is being used.
For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CAR-
TRIDGE SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
• Printer Error 2

The above printer error icon indicates:

- You need to remove paper from standard output tray.
- You need to remove paper from Job Separator.
- You need to remove paper from Finisher tray.

Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors 355

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

- You need to remove staples jammed in the Finisher. For information on resolving
the error condition, refer to “CLEAR PAPER SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual
for Basic Function.
- You need to clear hole punches from Finisher. For information on resolving the
error condition, refer to “DISPOSING OF THE PUNCHED PAPER BITS
(OPTIONAL)” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
- Non-recommended toner is being used. For information on resolving the error
condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE SYMBOL” in Operator’s
Manual for Basic Function.
- You need to remove excess staples from the Saddle-stitch Finisher.
- You performed saddle stitch printing using mixed paper sizes.
- Cannot load paper from the LCF.
- Cannot output to inner tray. (Only for e-STUDIO451c Series, e-STUDIO4511
Series, e-STUDIO450 Series, and e-STUDIO280 Series).
• Cover Open

The Cover Open error icon indicates that you need to close the cover.
• Drawer Open

The Drawer Open error icon shows that drawer is open. You must close the speci-
fied drawer to resume printing and copying functions.
• Toner Empty

The color of the Toner Empty icon varies depending on which toner cartridge is
empty:
- Black — Black Toner Empty
- Cyan — Cyan Toner Empty
- Magenta — Magenta Toner Empty
- Yellow — Yellow Toner Empty
For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER CAR-
TRIDGE SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
• Toner Full

The Toner Full error icon indicates you need to replace the toner container. For
information on resolving the error condition, refer to “REPLACE TONER BAG SYM-
BOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.

356 Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

• Paper Empty

The Out of Paper error icon shows that drawer is empty. A paper out condition does
not necessarily terminate a print or copy job. If Auto-select options are configured,
printing and copying may continue by drawing paper from a different drawer. Refer
to the TopAccess online Help for instructions on setting up Auto-Select mode. For
information on resolving the error condition, refer to “ADD PAPER SYMBOL” in
Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
• Paper Jam

The Paper Jam icon indicates that you need to remove jammed paper from the
equipment. For information on resolving the error condition, refer to “CLEAR
PAPER SYMBOL” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
• Staple Empty

The Add Staples error icon indicates you need to add staples to the finisher. For
information on resolving the error condition, refer to “ADDING STAPLES
(OPTIONAL)” in Operator’s Manual for Basic Function.
• Serviceman Calls

The Service Call error icon indicates that a call for service is needed. Contact your
service representative.

Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors 357

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 5. Troubleshooting

358 Printing Guide — TopAccessDocMon Errors

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

APPENDIX
6.

This section describe about the following contents.

• Managing Fonts with Font Manager ............................................................................................360
• Internal Fonts List .........................................................................................................................364

Printing Guide 359

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

Managing Fonts with Font Manager

The Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 program can be used to manage your fonts in
Windows. This program can be launch by clicking [Run Font Manager] on the Fonts tab
of the printer driver.

It can:
• Search your local and network drives for fonts.
• Install and uninstall fonts in Windows.
• Remove fonts from your computer.
• Preview or print the fonts on your computer or network.
• Create font groups for personal or workgroup projects.
• Sort your fonts in a variety of ways, etc.

Installing Font Manager

The Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000 can be installed from the Client Utilities CD-
ROM.

Searching Fonts
The first time you start Agfa Monotype Font Manager 2000, the Find Fonts dialog box
appears automatically. Before installing a font in Windows, you have to search the avail-
able fonts that can be installed by Font Manager 2000.

Searching fonts

1. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Search for Fonts...].

• The Find Fonts dialog box appears.

2. Select which drive you want to search for fonts.

Selected Drives — Select this to choose one of the drives when searching for
fonts.
All Drives — Select this to search on all drives when searching for fonts.
Selected Paths — Select this to enter the path to the drive when searching for
fonts. Enter the path to the drive you want to search when you select this.

3. Click [OK].
• When you select “Selected Drives”, Continue to the next step.
• When you select “All Drives”, skip to Step 6.
• When you select “Selected Paths”, skip to Step 6.

4. The Select Drives dialog box appears.

5. Select a drive to search for fonts from the list and click [OK].
6. Searching for fonts begins. The Search for fonts... dialog box
is displayed while searching for fonts.
• If you cancel to search for fonts, click [Stop].

7. The searched fonts are displayed at the Available Font list.

360 Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

Installing Fonts in Windows

After searching the fonts, you can install them in Windows. Once the fonts are installed
in Windows, the fonts can be displayed on the dialog box in applications and printed by
the machine.

Installing the TrueType fonts

1. Highlight the fonts you want to install in Windows from the

“Available Font List”.
2. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Install].
3. The fonts are installed in Windows and added to the installed
fonts list.

Uninstalling Fonts in Windows

You can uninstall the fonts in Windows. However, even if you uninstall the fonts from
Windows, the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted from the drive.

Uninstalling the TrueType fonts

1. Highlight the fonts you want to uninstall from Windows from

the installed fonts list.
2. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Un-install].
3. The fonts are uninstalled from Windows. The uninstalled
fonts are added to the “Available Fonts List”.

Removing Fonts from the Computer

You can remove from your computer the fonts that no longer be required. Even if you
uninstall the fonts from Windows, the source files of the uninstalled fonts are not deleted
from the hard drive. You can remove the sources of the uninstalled fonts from your com-
puter by this function.
Before removing the fonts, the fonts must be uninstalled from Windows first.

Removing the TrueType font files from your computer

1. Highlight the fonts you want to remove from your computer

in the installed fonts list.
2. Click the [Fonts] menu and select [Remove Font].
3. The Remove Fonts dialog box appears.

Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager 361

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

4. Check on the box for “Delete font(s) from the hard disk” and
click [OK].
• If you do not check on the checkbox for “Delete font(s) from the hard disk”,
the source of the fonts are not deleted from the hard disk. If you want to
remove the fonts from the Available Font List but do not want to delete the
source file, do not check this checkbox.

5. The source files of the fonts are deleted from the hard drive.

Displaying Font Preview

You can preview the fonts that are displayed in the Available Font List and the installed
fonts list.

Previewing fonts

1. Highlight a font you want to preview from the Available Font

List or the installed fonts list.
2. Click [Fonts] menu and select [Preview].
3. The Preview dialog box appears. The sample font is dis-
played on the dialog box.
Point Size — You can select the point size of the sample font displayed.
Normal Styles — When this is selected, the font is displayed in the normal face
on the dialog box.
All Styles — When this is selected, the font is displayed in all of its available font
faces in the dialog box.

Creating a Font Group

You can create a group of fonts and give a descriptive name to the group. The created
group can be used to install or uninstall the fonts in Windows. This function can be used
to configure the different working scenarios of the fonts for each user.

Creating a font group

1. Select the Font Groups folder and click the [Fonts] menu and
select [New Group...].
• The New Group dialog box appears.

2. Enter the group name in the Group Name field.

3. In the All Available Fonts, expand each folder and select the
fonts that you want to add to the group.
4. Click [Add>>].
• The selected fonts are added to the Fonts in Group list.

5. Click [OK].
6. The created group is added to the Font Groups list.

362 Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

Sorting Fonts in the List

You can sort and change the order of fonts to be displayed in the Available Font and
Installed Fonts list.

Sorting by Name
Click the [Sort] menu and click [Sort by Name]. The fonts are listed alphabetically by the
font family name.

Sorting by Font Type

Click the [Sort] menu and click [Sort by Font Type]. The fonts are grouped according to
their technology type (TrueType, Type 1, or screen bitmap) and within each group the
names will be listed alphabetically.

Inverting the Alphabetical Order

The lists can be inverted by clicking on the [Sort] menu and [Inverse Sort].

Printing Guide — Managing Fonts with Font Manager 363

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

Internal Fonts List

Internal PCL Fonts List

0 Courier 40 Helvetica-BoldOblique
1 CG-Times 41 Helvetica-Narrow
2 CG-Times Bold 42 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
3 CG-Times Italic 43 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
4 CG-Times Bold Italic 44 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
5 CG Omega 45 Palatino-Roman
6 CG Omega Bold 46 Palatino-Bold
7 CG Omega Italic 47 Palatino-Italic
8 CG Omega Bold Italic 48 Palatino-BoldItalic
9 Coronet 49 ITC AvantGarde-Book
10 Clarendon Condensed 50 ITC AvantGarde-BookOblique
11 Univers Medium 51 ITC AvantGarde-Demi
12 Univers Bold 52 ITC AvantGarde-DemiOblique
13 Univers Italic 53 ITC Bookman-Light
14 Univers Bold Italic 54 ITC Bookman-LightItalic
15 Univers Medium Condensed 55 ITC Bookman-Demi
16 Univers Condensed Bold 56 ITC Bookman-DemiItalic
17 Univers Medium Condensed Italic 57 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman
18 Univers Condensed Bold Italic 58 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
19 Antique Olive 59 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic
20 Antique Olive Bold 60 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
21 Antique Olive Italic 61 Times-Roman
22 Garamond Antiqua 62 Times-Bold
23 Garamond Halbfett 63 Times-Italic
24 Garamond Kursiv 64 Times-BoldItalic
25 Garamond Kursiv Halbfett 65 ITCZapfChancery-MediumItalic
26 Mrigold 66 Symbol
27 Albertus Medium 67 Symbol PS
28 Albertus Extra Bold 68 Wingdings
29 Arial 69 ITCZapfDingbats
30 Arial Bold 70 Courier Bold
31 Arial Italic 71 Courier Italic
32 Arial Bold Italic 72 Courier Bold Italic
33 Times New Roman 73 Letter Gothic Regular
34 Times New Roman Bold 74 Letter Gothic Bold
35 Times New Roman Italic 75 Letter Gothic Italic
36 Times New Roman Bold Italic 76 CourierPS
37 Helvetica 77 CourierPS Oblique
38 Helvetica-Bold 78 CourierPS Bold
39 Helvetica-Oblique 79 CourierPS BoldOblique

364 Printing Guide — Internal Fonts List

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

Internal PS Fonts List

1 AlbertusMT-Light 43 Eurostile-ExtendedTwo
2 AlbertusMT 44 Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo
3 AlbertusMT-Italic 45 Geneva
4 AntiqueOlive-Roman 46 GillSans-Light
5 AntiqueOlive-Italic 47 GillSans-LightItalic
6 AntiqueOlive-Bold 48 GillSans
7 AntiqueOlive-Compact 49 GillSans-Italic
8 Apple-Chancery 50 GillSans-Bold
9 ArialMT 51 GillSans-BoldItalic
10 Arial-ItalicMT 52 GillSans-ExtraBold
11 Arial-BoldMT 53 GillSans-BoldCondensed
12 Arial-BoldItalicMT 54 GillSans-Condensed
13 AvantGarde-Book 55 Goudy
14 AvantGarde-BookOblique 56 Goudy-Italic
15 AvantGarde-Demi 57 Goudy-Bold
16 AvantGarde-DemiOblique 58 Goudy-BoldItalic
17 Bodoni 59 Goudy-ExtraBold
18 Bodoni-Italic 60 Helvetica
19 Bodoni-Bold 61 Helvetica-Oblique
20 Bodoni-BoldItalic 62 Helvetica-Bold
21 Bodoni-Poster 63 Helvetica-BoldOblique
22 Bodoni-PosterCompressed 64 Helvetica-Condensed
23 Bookman-Light 65 Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique
24 Bookman-LightItalic 66 Helvetica-Condensed-Bold
25 Bookman-Demi 67 Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl
26 Bookman-DemiItalic 68 Helvetica-Narrow
27 Candid 69 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique
28 Chicago 70 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold
29 Clarendon-Light 71 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique
30 Clarendon 72 HoeflerText-Regular
31 Clarendon-Bold 73 HoeflerText-Italic
32 CooperBlack 74 HoeflerText-Black
33 CooperBlack-Italic 75 HoeflerText-BlackItalic
34 Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC 76 HoeflerText-Ornaments
35 Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC 77 JoannaMT
36 Coronet-Regular 78 JoannaMT-Italic
37 Courier 79 JoannaMT-Bold
38 Courier-Oblique 80 JoannaMT-BoldItalic
39 Courier-Bold 81 LetterGothic
40 Courier-BoldOblique 82 LetterGothic-Slanted
41 Eurostile 83 LetterGothic-Bold
42 Eurostile-Bold 84 LetterGothic-BoldSlanted

Printing Guide — Internal Fonts List 365

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 6. Appendix

85 LubalinGraph-Book 128 Univers-CondensedBold

86 LubalinGraph-BookOblique 129 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique
87 LubalinGraph-Demi 130 Univers-Extended
88 LubalinGraph-DemiOblique 131 Univers-ExtendedObl
89 Marigold 132 Univers-BoldExt
90 Monaco 133 Univers-BoldExtObl
91 MonaLisa-Recut 134 Wingdings-Regular
92 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman 135 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic
93 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic 136 ZapfDingbats
94 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold
95 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic
96 NewYork
97 Optima
98 Optima-Italic
99 Optima-Bold
100 Optima-BoldItalic
101 Oxford
102 Palatino-Roman
103 Palatino-Italic
104 Palatino-Bold
105 Palatino-BoldItalic
106 StempelGaramond-Roman
107 StempelGaramond-Italic
108 StempelGaramond-Bold
109 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic
110 Symbol
111 Taffy
112 Times-Roman
113 Times-Italic
114 Times-Bold
115 Times-BoldItalic
116 TimesNewRomanPSMT
117 TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT
118 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT
119 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT
120 Univers-Light
121 Univers-LightOblique
122 Univers
123 Univers-Oblique
124 Univers-Bold
125 Univers-BoldOblique
126 Univers-Condensed
127 Univers-CondensedOblique

366 Printing Guide — Internal Fonts List

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 INDEX

INDEX

INDEX 367
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 INDEX
Numerics Destination .............................. 216, 270, 293
2-Sided Printing ................................214, 248 Devices ....................................................327
Disable/Enable ..........................................317
A Discovery Settings ............................ 327, 335
A4 Tab .............................................210, 259 Distinguish Thin Lines 232, 234, 235, 273, 289,
About Tab ................................................ 208 290
Add Device ......................................331, 332 Do not Print Blank Pages .................. 229, 273
All pages from .......................................... 287 Document Monitoring Tabs .........................329
Always Download needed fonts .................. 267 Document Notification ................................320
Angle ...............................................231, 257 Draw as Outline ............................... 231, 257
Annotate Font Keys ................................... 267 Draw Border Around Pages ............... 225, 253
AppleTalk Printing ..................................... 155 Drawer 1 ..................................................238
Drawer 2 ..................................................238
B Drawer 3 ..................................................238
Background Printing .................................. 265 Drawer 4 ..................................................238
Billing Info ................................................ 286 Duplicate ................................. 222, 227, 250
Binding ............................................269, 283
Black Over Print ....................... 235, 277, 291 E
Booklet Center Margin .......................274, 297 Effect Tab .................................................207
Booklet Outer Margin ........................274, 297 Enable IPX/SPX Search .................... 327, 335
Booklet Page Layout ................................. 274 Enable SNMP Communication ....................238
Booklet Page Size .............................274, 297 Enable TCP/IP Search ...................... 328, 335
Border .............................................269, 282 Event Notification ......................................339
Brightness ................................................ 234 Events ......................................................319
Bypass Feeder ......................................... 238
F
C Features .....................................................16
Caption ............................................230, 256 Filter ..........................................................18
Center Margin ...................................224, 251 Find All Devices on the Network ..................335
Center Watermark ..................................... 230 Find TOSHIBA Devices ..............................335
Change Printer ......................................... 331 Finisher ........................................... 196, 237
Change Rate ............................................ 320 First page from ..........................................288
Client CD-ROM ........................................... 17 Font Manager .................................... 20, 360
Client Utilities CD-ROM ............................... 18 Font Name ...................................... 230, 256
Collated ...........................................264, 281 Font Size ......................................... 231, 256
Color ....................................................... 212 Fonts Tab .................................................208
Color Resolution Type .......................276, 290 Format .....................................................284
Compress Bitmap ..................................... 231 Format for ........................................ 263, 279
Configuration Settings ............................... 194 Functions ...................................................16
Configuration Tab ..................................... 208
[Configuration] tab .............................196, 197 G
Configure ................................................. 317 General ....................................................264
Connection Status ..................................... 330 General Errors ..........................................344
Considerations ......................................... 201 GL-DocMon ................................................20
Copies .............................................264, 281
Copy Handling ..................................212, 245 H
Cover Page Paper Source ......................... 267 Halftone .................................. 232, 233, 235
Cover Page Type ...................................... 286 Help .........................................................208
CUPS ...................................................... 177 Hole Punch ............. 213, 248, 270, 293, 331
Custom .................................................... 259 Hole Punch Unit ............................... 196, 238
How to Print ..............................................201
D
Department ......................................200, 216 I
Department Code .............................194, 273 If there is PostScript error ...........................267
Department Code (DC) .............................. 296 Image Quality Tab .....................................208
Department Code (DC) On .................289, 290 Image Quality Type .......................... 233, 235
Image Shift Margin ....................................259

368 INDEX
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 INDEX
Image Shift Width ..................................... 210 Novell iPrint ....................................... 26, 143
Initial Values ............................................. 203 Novell Printing .................................... 25, 118
Insert Page .............................................. 219 Number of Copies .....................................212
Insert Pages ............................................. 249 Number of pages per Sheet ........................253
Install Software link ................................... 188 Number of pages per sheet ........................225
Installation Error ....................................... 343 Number Pages from Right to Left ....... 224, 252
Installed ...........................................318, 321
Installer ...................................................... 17 O
Intent ....................................................... 266 Orientation ............................... 212, 264, 279
Interleave Pages ...................... 221, 227, 250 Original Paper Size ................... 209, 246, 259
Internal Fonts ........................................... 364 Outer Margin .................................... 224, 252
Internet Connection ..................................... 24 Output Document Layout .................. 223, 251
IP Address .......................................326, 334 Output Format ...........................................231
IP/IPX Address .................................321, 330 Overlay Image ................................. 228, 258
IPP Printing ........................................24, 112
IPX Address .....................................326, 334 P
Item/Refresh Rate ..................................... 320 Page per Sheet .........................................282
Page per sheet ..........................................268
J Pages ............................................. 264, 281
Job Documentation ................................... 268 Paper .......................................................263
Job Documentation Folder ......................... 268 Paper Size ................................................279
Paper Source ................................... 211, 265
L Paper Type ...............................................211
Large Capacity ......................................... 238 Parallel Port Connection ...............................22
Layout Direction ........................................ 282 Parallel Printing .................................... 22, 27
Layout direction ........................................ 269 PCL Fonts ................................................364
Layout Tab ............................................... 207 Pedestal .......................................... 196, 237
Left to Right Page Layout .......................... 297 Physical Address .......................................331
Letter Tab ........................................210, 259 Point and Print ............................................96
Limitations ................................................ 201 Port ..........................................................321
Local Area Network ..................................... 23 PostScript ...................................................17
Local Discovery ........................................ 323 PostScript Error .........................................287
Location .................................. 326, 331, 334 PostScript Settings ....................................229
lp command ............................................. 298 PPD .................................................. 18, 200
LPR Printing ................................ 23, 64, 151 Preferred Format .......................................267
LPT1 ......................................................... 22 Preview window ........................................208
lptap ........................................................ 298 Primary Tab Dialog ....................................210
Print Color ................................................266
M Print Cover Page .............................. 266, 286
Macintosh PPD ......................................... 150 Print Document .........................................285
Manual Scale ...................................209, 246 Print Error Information ................................231
Manual Selection ..............................326, 334 Print in .....................................................265
Memory ................................................... 238 Print Job Status Messages .........................342
Menu Bar Options ..................................... 328 Print Job Tab ............................................207
Menu Tabs ............................................... 207 Print Mode ............................... 273, 288, 289
Method .................................................... 320 Print on Both Sides ........................... 269, 283
Mirror ....................................................... 229 Print on first page only ...................... 228, 255
Model ...................................................... 331 Print Options .............................................203
Print over the document .............................229
N Print Paper Size ....................... 210, 246, 259
Name ..................................... 326, 331, 334 Print Queue ..............................................321
Negative/Positive ...................................... 229 Print to Overlay File .......................... 216, 243
Network Discovery .................................... 332 printer description file .................................200
Never generate Type 42 format .................. 267 Printer Drivers ................................ 17, 20, 21
Normal Print ............................................. 215 Printer Icon ...............................................330
Notification .......................................318, 319 Printer Image ............................................331

INDEX 369
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 INDEX
Printer Information .................................... 331 TopAccessDocMon .................... 20, 316, 317
Printer Name ....................................207, 321 Transparency ................................... 231, 257
Printer Profile ........................................... 266 Tray Switching ..........................................287
Printer Status ........................................... 321 TrueType Options ......................................236
Printers File Menu ..................................... 322 Two Sided Printing ....................................282
Priority ..................................................... 285
Private Print .....................................215, 240 U
Profile ..............................................204, 208 Uninstalling ...............................................144
Proof Print ........................................215, 242 Unit ..........................................................210
PS Fonts .................................................. 365 Units ............................................... 224, 230
Pure Black ............................................... 235 Update .....................................................321
Pure Black and Gray .........................277, 291 Update Automatically ........................ 198, 238
Pure Gray ........................................234, 236 Update Now ..............................................238
USB Connection ..........................................22
R USB Driver .................................................17
Raw TCP Printing .................................23, 64 USB Printing ........................................ 22, 53
Refresh Rate ............................................ 320 Use Back Cover ....................... 219, 226, 249
Refresh Rates .......................................... 318 Use Black for All Text ................ 232, 234, 236
Remaining from ........................................ 288 Use Front Cover ...... 218, 224, 226, 249, 252
Resolution ............................... 232, 233, 235 Use PostScript Passthrough .......................231
Restore Defaults ...............................208, 320
Reverse page order .................................. 286 W
Rotate 180 degrees ................................... 229 Watermark ....................................... 228, 255
Run Font Manager .................................... 237 Watermark Font ........................................275
Run the document monitor when starting Windows Watermark Gray Level ...............................275
318 Watermark Outline ....................................276
Watermark Position ...................................275
S Watermark Text ........................................275
Saturation ................................................ 234 Watermark Text Angle ...............................275
Save as File ............................................. 284 Watermark Text Size .................................275
Scale ...............................................264, 279 Watermarking ...........................................275
Scheduled Print ................................215, 239
Setup Tab ........................................207, 209 X
SMB Printing ........................................24, 85 X Position .................................................230
Smoothing ...............232, 234, 235, 277, 291
Solid ................................................231, 257 Y
Staple ..............................................212, 247 Y Position .................................................230
Staple Down the Center .....................224, 252
Start Discovery .................................324, 332
Startup ..................................................... 318
Status ..............................................329, 331
Status Bar ................................................ 329
Store to e-Filing ................................216, 244
Style ........................................................ 230
Substitution Table Edit ............................... 237
System Requirements
Mac OS ................................................ 150
UNIX .................................................... 168
Windows ................................................. 21

T
Tab Extension ..................................210, 259
Tab Manufacturer .............................210, 259
TCP/IP ....................................................... 23
Toner Save ............................. 229, 277, 291
TopAccess .......................................188, 317

370 INDEX
More user manuals on ManualsBase.com
 FC-281C/351C/451C
OME05005000

More user manuals on ManualsBase.com

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL COLOR SYSTEMS
Printing Guide

2-17-2, HIGASHIGOTANDA, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8664, JAPAN

R05022084100-TTEC
©2005 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved 2005-06